Sony DSR 400PK User Manual

3-868-500-03 (1)  
Digital Camcorder  
Operating Instructions  
Before operating the unit, please read this manual  
thoroughly and retain it for future reference.  
DSR-400L/400PL  
DSR-400K/400PK  
DSR-450WSL/450WSPL  
© 2005 Sony Corporation  
You are cautioned that any changes or modifications not  
expressly approved in this manual could void your  
authority to operate this equipment.  
Pour les utilisateurs aux Etats-Unis et au Canada.  
RECYCLAGE DES ACCUMULATEURS AUX IONS DE  
LITHIUM  
Les accumulateurs aux ions de lithium  
sont recyclables.  
Vous pouvez contribuer à préserver  
l’environnement en rapportant les piles  
usées dans un point de collection et  
recyclage le plus proche.  
The shielded interface cable recommended in this manual  
must be used with this equipment in order to comply with  
the limits for a digital device pursuant to Subpart B of Part  
15 of FCC Rules.  
For the customers in Europe  
Pour plus d’informations sur le recyclage des  
accumulateurs, téléphonez au numéro gratuit  
1-800-822-8837 (Etats-Unis et Canada uniquement), ou  
visitez http://www.rbrc.org/  
This product with the CE marking complies with the EMC  
Directive (89/336/EEC) issued by the Commission of the  
European Community.  
Compliance with this directive implies conformity to the  
following European standards:  
• EN55103-1: Electromagnetic Interference (Emission)  
• EN55103-2: Electromagnetic Susceptibility (Immunity)  
This product is intended for use in the following  
Electromagnetic Environment(s):  
E1 (residential), E2 (commercial and light industrial), E3  
(urban outdoors) and E4 (controlled EMC environment,  
ex. TV studio).  
Avertissment: Ne pas utiliser des accumulateurs aux ions  
de lithium qui sont endommagés ou qui fuient.  
Für Kunden in Europa  
Dieses Produkt besitzt die CE-Kennzeichnung Und erfüllt  
die EMV-Richtlinie (89/336/EWG) der EG-Kommission.  
Angewandte Normen:  
• EN55103-1: Elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit  
(Störaussendung)  
Pour les clients européens  
• EN55103-2: Elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit  
(Störfestigkeit),  
für die folgenden elektromagnetischen Umgebungen: E1  
(Wohnbereich), E2 (kommerzieller und in beschränktem  
Maße industrieller Bereich), E3 (Stadtbereich im Freien)  
und E4 (kontrollierter EMV-Bereich, z.B. Fernsehstudio).  
Ce produit portant la marque CE est conforme à la  
Directive sur la compatibilité électromagnétique (EMC)  
(89/336/CEE) émise par la Commission de la  
Communauté européenne.  
La conformité à cette directive implique la conformité aux  
normes européennes suivantes:  
For the customers in Taiwan only  
• EN55103-1: Interférences électromagnétiques  
(émission)  
• EN55103-2: Sensibilité électromagnétique (immunité)  
Ce produit est prévu pour être utilisé dans les  
environnements électromagnétiques suivants:  
E1 (résidentiel), E2 (commercial et industrie légère),  
E3 (urbain extérieur) et E4 (environnement EMC contrôlé,  
ex. studio de télévision).  
Voor de Klanten in Nederland  
Gooi de batterij niet weg maar lever deze in  
als klein chemisch afval (KCA).  
For the customers in the USA and Canada  
RECYCLING LITHIUM-ION BATTERIES  
Lithium-Ion batteries are recyclable.  
You can help preserve our environment by  
returning your used rechargeable batteries  
to the collection and recycling location  
nearest you.  
For more information regarding recycling  
of rechargeable batteries, call toll free 1-800-822-8837, or  
visit  
Für Kunden in Deutschland  
Entsorgungshinweis: Bitte werfen Sie nur entladene  
Batterien in die Sammelboxen beim Handel oder den  
Kommunen. Entladen sind Batterien in der Regel dann,  
wenn das Gerät abschaltet und signalisiert “Batterie leer”  
oder nach längerer Gebrauchsdauer der Batterien “nicht  
mehr einwandfrei funktioniert”. Um sicherzugehen,  
kleben Sie die Batteriepole z.B. mit einem Klebestreifen  
ab oder geben Sie die Batterien einzeln in einen  
Plastikbeutel.  
http://www.rbrc.org/  
Caution: Do not handle damaged or leaking lithium-ion  
batteries.  
Note about laser beams  
Laser beams can damage the CCDs of this camcorder. In  
environments where laser beams are used, be careful to  
prevent the laser beams from striking the surfaces of the  
CCDs.  
3
Table of Contents  
Connecting the Remote Control Unit  
Settings required for an i.LINK  
Making a backup of the images being  
Attaching and Replacing the Lithium  
Avoiding breaks in operation due to an  
Adjusting the viewfinder position ..............31  
Adjusting the black balance/white  
Starting back space editing at any tape  
Using the edit search function while back  
(brightness, contrast, and outline  
4
 
Recording Analog Composite Signals  
Setting the date/time of the internal  
DSR-450WS/450WSP only) ...............64  
Playing and Checking Recorded  
Assigning functions to ASSIGN  
Selecting the aspect ratio  
Setting the CCD scan mode  
Checking the recorded contents immediately  
Checking the recording on the color video  
Chapter 5 Menu Displays and  
Chapter 6 Saving and Loading the  
Saving USER menu data (user file) to  
Loading saved data from  
Using the USER menu (Example of the  
Resetting USER menu settings to the  
Resetting the settings of the camcorder  
Displaying a File-Related Menu Page  
Setting the Status Display on the  
Monitor ...............................................98  
Display modes and setting change  
messages............................................99  
Recording shot data superimposed on the  
Displaying the status confirmation  
Adjustments and Settings from  
Chart of Optional Components and  
Setting gain values for the GAIN switch  
Selecting the output signals  
Specifying an offset for the auto white  
5
Overview  
Chapter  
Product Configurations  
The DSR-400/450WS Digital Camcorder series is made  
up of the DSR-400K/400PK, DSR-400L/400PL, and  
DSR-450WSL/450WSPL models depending on the  
product configuration, as shown in the figure below.  
The camcorders comprise both NTSC and PAL versions.  
The operation of the basic camcorder is the same in all  
cases.  
DSR-400K/400PK  
DSR-400L/400PL, DSR-450WSL/450WSPL  
Microphone  
DXF-801  
Viewfinder *  
VCT-U14  
Tripod Adaptor  
Test chart for flange focal  
length adjustment  
VCL-917BY Zoom Lens  
Shoulder strap  
• Lens mount cap  
• Operating Instructions  
DSR-400/400P/450WS/450WSP  
Camcorder  
* Part number A-8279-329-A  
6
Product Configurations  
       
images. (The video image is recorded as an interlaced scan  
signal (60i) by 2-3 pull-down conversion.)  
Features  
For details on recording in progressive scan mode, see  
*
The DSR-400/400P DVCAM digital camcorder is  
equipped with a 2/3-inch type Power HAD EX CCD with  
*
an aspect ratio of 4:3. The DSR-450WS/450WSP  
DVCAM digital camcorder is equipped with a 2/3-inch  
type Power HAD EX CCD with a wide-screen aspect ratio  
of 16:9. In addition to the same main features, functions,  
and operation method of previous models, these new  
camcorders provide superior camera functionality.  
ASSIGN (Assignable) switches  
Assignable switches provided on the side panel and on the  
top of the grip, respectively, can be assigned to functions  
such as ATW, VTR start/stop, etc., to suit your needs.  
When shooting, these functions can then be called up  
instantly.  
* “DVCAM” and “Power HAD” are registered trademarks of Sony  
Corporation.  
Scene file  
You can save various settings for shooting a particular  
scene as a scene file in the internal memory of the  
camcorder. Loading the scene file, you can quickly  
recreate the same setup conditions suitable for shooting a  
particular scene.  
Camera features  
2/3-inch Power HAD EX CCDs  
The three high-sensitivity, low-smear 2/3-inch Power HAD  
EX CCDs provide high image quality putting this camera  
at the top of its class for a standard NTSC/PAL definition  
camcorder.  
• Smear: –140 dB  
• Sensitivity: F11 (3200K, 2000lx)  
“Memory Stick” slot  
The camcorder is equipped with a “Memory Stick” slot.  
When using the scene file function, you can save menu  
settings on a “Memory Stick” and quickly recall them  
when necessary. Also, when two or more camcorders are  
used for shooting, the settings of the first camcorder can be  
copied to the others via the “Memory Stick”, making color  
matching easier.  
• S/N ratio: 65 dB (DSR-400/450WS), 63 dB (DSR-400P/  
450WSP)  
The DSR-450WS/450WSP allows you to switch between  
a 16:9 aspect-ratio wide image and a 4:3 aspect-ratio  
standard image.  
Programmable gain  
The value of gain that is assigned to the setting (H/M/L) of  
the GAIN switch can be selected from –3dB, 0dB, 3dB,  
6dB, 9dB, 12dB, 18dB, 24dB, 30dB, and 36dB.  
2.5-inch color LCD monitor  
A 2.5-inch color LCD monitor is mounted on the side of  
the camcorder. You can check the video image during both  
recording and playback. Also, the LCD monitor angle can  
be adjusted freely to make high-angle and low-angle  
recording easier. The time code and an audio level meter  
can also be displayed on the LCD monitor.  
Electric CC filter  
The CC filter that was previously paired with the ND filter  
has been eliminated, so the ND filter is now the  
camcorder’s only optical filter and this makes operation of  
the camcorder easier. With the wide-band white balance  
amplifier of this camcorder, the white balance can be  
adjusted in a wide range of color temperatures without an  
optical CC filter.  
Stylish design  
The basic design of the camcorder has been improved.  
Stylish angles and an attractive finish for the VTR section  
are combined with a wide, easy-to-use connector section  
on the back of the camcorder.  
Auto-tracing white balance (ATW)  
This function automatically traces the white balance,  
which constantly changes as lighting conditions change.  
Auto-tracing white balance is especially useful when there  
is no time to manually adjust the white balance, or when  
shooting moves between indoor and outdoor locations.  
Adjustable shoulder pad  
The camcorder is equipped with an adjustable shoulder  
pad that makes it possible to adjust the position of the  
camcorder to shoot from a stable position regardless of the  
body size and shooting style of the camera operator.  
A variety of shutter functions  
• Electronic shutter  
The high-performance electronic shutter allows you to  
record a video image at a high resolution even when  
shooting fast-moving objects.  
Recording in progressive scan mode  
(DSR-450WS/450WSP only)  
You can record in a progressive scan mode of 30 PsF  
(DSR-450WS) or 25 PsF (DSR-450WSP). (The video  
image is recorded as an interlaced scan signal (60i (DSR-  
450WS) or 50i (DSR-450WSP)).) Also for the DSR-  
450WS, a 24P mode makes it possible to record film-like  
• ECS  
The ECS (Extended Clear Scan) mode allows you to adjust  
the shutter speed more precisely. You can set shutter speed  
7
Features  
     
to a value close to the scan frequency of a computer  
display, so that the horizontal band and flicker that appear  
when recording a computer display can be reduced.  
• Slow shutter (DSR-450WS/450WSP only)  
A slow shutter function allows you to set the exposure time  
longer than 1 frame. By doing so, sensitivity is improved  
dramatically. Also, dreamlike images using the  
afterimages can be shot.  
VTR features  
Standard-size and mini-size DVCAM cassettes  
Equipped with a tape drive with an original Sony  
mechanism, this camcorder can use both standard-size  
DVCAM cassettes (a standard cassette that can record a  
maximum of 180 minutes in DVCAM mode) and mini-  
size DVCAM cassettes (a small cassette that is convenient  
to carry and store). Both can be used without an adaptor.  
Setting of multiple gamma curves  
(DSR-450WS/450WSP only)  
Compatible with DV recording (SP mode)  
Setting of multiple gamma curves is possible using a  
menu. You can shoot using image tones that suit your  
purpose, such as making film-like images.  
In addition to recording in DVCAM mode, this camcorder  
can record in the same DV mode that is widely available in  
consumer-use camcorders. (Only recording in SP mode is  
available. LP mode is not available for either recording or  
playback.) Recording in DV format allows a longer  
recording time, 270 minutes for a DVCAM 180-minute  
tape. This helps to reduce tape-changing time and the risk  
of missing important scenes when shooting a long event.  
Dual zebra pattern display  
Two types of zebra patterns can be set at independent  
display levels. They can be used in various ways; for  
example, one can be set to the brightness level of the main  
objects, and the other can be set to a higher brightness  
level.  
PCM digital audio  
For tapes recorded in DVCAM mode, recording/playback  
can be set to audio lock mode. You can choose between the  
two-channel recording mode (with a sampling frequency  
of 48 kHz) or the four-channel recording mode (with a  
sampling frequency of 32 kHz, records only CH-1 and CH-  
2 on this camcorder).  
Video light connector  
A video light connector (maximum 50 W) and control  
switch are provided. You can set the switch to turn the light  
on and off automatically as you start and stop the VTR.  
Remote control connectors  
(DSR-450WS/450WSP only)  
Instead of making settings using menus, detailed settings  
of the camcorder can be made using an optional RM-B150  
or B750 remote control unit connected to the camcorder.  
*
(i.LINK) DV OUT connector  
This camcorder has an (i.LINK) DV OUT connector.  
You can connect other DVCAM/DV recorders or i.LINK  
(DV) compatible non-linear editing equipment supporting  
a digital signal interface without degradation. Connecting  
external VTR equipment allows you to back up recordings  
to avoid missing any scenes by mistake. Also, you can set  
the REC TRIGGER switch to suit your needs and you can  
control the VTR sections of the camcorder and any  
external equipment independently.  
High-capacity BP-GL95 Battery Pack  
The camcorder supports the information battery function.  
When using a BP-GL65/GL95 Battery Pack, more  
accurate and detailed information on remaining battery  
power is displayed in the viewfinder.  
High-functionality DXF-801 Viewfinder  
The supplied DXF-801 Viewfinder has the following  
features.  
• High resolution (600 TV lines of horizontal resolution)  
• A DISPLAY switch that can turn the character display  
on and off  
• A light for the lens control elements  
• A large-diameter eye cup with a flip-up mechanism for  
viewing with the eye apart from it  
• A peaking potentiometer for vertical and horizontal  
detail control  
* “i.LINK” and  
are trademarks.  
VBS video input signal (DSR-450WS/450WSP  
only)  
By installing an optional CBK-SC01 Composite Input  
Board, the camcorder can input and record an external  
analog video signal. This is useful for pool coverage, etc.  
Interval Rec function  
Using the Interval Rec function, you can create time-lapse  
videos. This is useful for various specialized projects, such  
as time-lapse recording of plant growth, etc.  
• A tough, die-cast aluminium body  
• Automatic aspect ratio switching between 16:9 and 4:3  
(DSR-450WS/450WSP only)  
8
Features  
   
Location and Function of Parts  
Front view  
5 VF connector  
6 Lens mount  
7 FILTER selector  
8 ZEBRA button  
1 Lens mount cap  
9 ASSIGN 1/2 switches  
2 LENS connector  
0 Lens locking lever  
qa MENU knob  
qs SHUTTER switch  
3 REC button  
4 AUTO W/B BAL switch  
qd AUDIO LEVEL knob  
a Lens mount cap  
d AUTO W/B BAL (automatic white/black balance  
adjustment) switch  
Activates the white/black balance automatic adjustment  
Remove by pushing up the lens locking lever (page 10).  
When no lens is mounted, keep this cap fitted for  
protection from dust.  
functions.  
WHT: Adjusts the white balance automatically. If the  
WHITE BAL switch (page 11) is set to A or B, the  
white balance setting is stored in the corresponding  
memory.  
b LENS connector (12-pin)  
Connect the lens cable. Contact your Sony representative  
for more information about the lens you can use.  
BLK: Adjusts the black set and black balance  
automatically.  
c REC (recording start) button  
Press to start recording. Press it again to stop recording.  
The effect is exactly the same as that of the VTR button on  
the lens. When the REC SWITCH function is assigned to  
the ASSIGN switch on the FUNCTION 1 page of the  
OPERATION menu, you can use the switch as the REC  
button.  
e VF (viewfinder) connector (20-pin)  
Connect the supplied DXF-801 Viewfinder.  
f Lens mount (special bayonet mount)  
Attach the lens.  
You can select the recording format for the video signal  
from either DVCAM mode or DV-SP mode on the VTR  
MODE page of the MAINTENANCE menu.  
g FILTER selector  
Selects the most appropriate filter to match the light source  
illuminating the subject. When this selector is used with  
the display mode set to 3 (page 99), the new setting  
appears on the viewfinder screen for about 3 seconds.  
In the recording pause state, the camcorder waits for a  
certain period of time in the standby-on mode and then  
automatically switches to standby-off mode. This length of  
the standby-on period with no operation can be set to  
either 1 minute, 3 minutes, or 5 minutes on the VTR MODE  
page of the MAINTENANCE menu.  
FILTER selector setting and examples of shooting  
conditions  
FILTER selector setting Examples of shooting  
conditions  
1 (CLEAR)  
Studio halogen lighting  
(incandescent)  
2 (1/4 ND)  
Cloudy or rainy outdoor shooting,  
or to reduce the depth of field*  
3 (1/16 ND)  
4 (1/64 ND)  
Sunlight  
To reduce the depth of field in  
sunlight  
9
Location and Function of Parts  
                           
* The range over which the subject is sharply in focus. Thus, “reducing the  
depth of field” means that the range is reduced as well, and “increasing the  
depth of field” means that it is increasing as well.  
k MENU knob  
Changes the page selection or a setting within the menu.  
For details about how to use the MENU knob, see “Basic  
h ZEBRA button  
Press to display a zebra pattern (diagonal stripes) in the  
viewfinder screen.  
l SHUTTER switch  
The zebra pattern is factory set to indicate picture areas  
where the video level is approximately 70%. However, on  
the VF SETTING page of the OPERATION menu, you  
can change the setting so that areas where the video level  
is 100% and above also displayed at the same time.  
Set to ON to use the electronic shutter. Flick to SEL to  
switch the shutter speed or shutter mode setting within the  
range previously set with the menu. When this switch is  
operated, the new setting appears on the setting change/  
adjustment progress message display area for about 3  
seconds.  
For details about the shutter speed and shutter mode  
i ASSIGN 1/2 switches  
You can assign the desired functions on the FUNCTION 1  
page of the OPERATION menu.  
m AUDIO LEVEL knob  
Adjusts the channel 1 audio input level manually. You can  
invalidate the setting of this knob in the F AUDIO VOL  
item on the AUDIO page of the MAINTENANCE menu.  
j Lens locking lever  
After inserting the lens in the lens mount, rotate the lens  
mount ring with this lever to lock the lens in position.  
Right side view  
Front section  
1 5600K button  
6 MONITOR knob  
7 ALARM knob  
2 LIGHT switch  
8 LCD monitor  
3 OUTPUT/DCC switch  
9 MENU switch  
4 GAIN switch  
0 WHITE BAL switch  
5 POWER switch  
a 5600K button  
AUTO: When the POWER switch of the video light is in  
the on position, the video light is turned on  
automatically while the camcorder is recording.  
MAN: You can turn the video light on or off manually,  
using its own switch.  
Press to lit the button and switch the standard color  
temperature for shooting to 5600K. Use this button for  
outdoor shooting in daytime or shooting under lighting  
with higher temperature. While setting the wide-band  
white balance, the button does not function.  
Note  
b LIGHT switch  
• When this switch is set to AUTO, at the beginning of the  
recording, the picture is recorded even though the  
lighting may fluctuate until the video light comes on. If  
the beginning of the recording is important, you should  
Determines how a video light connected to the LIGHT  
connector (page 16) is turned on and off.  
10  
Location and Function of Parts  
                     
set this switch to MAN. However, when using the  
interval recording mode, the video light is automatically  
turned on immediately before recording starts.  
• To ensure proper operation of the video light, Sony  
recommends the use of the battery pack BP-GL65,  
BP-GL95, or BP-L60S with the camcorder.  
g ALARM (alarm tone volume adjustment) knob  
Controls the volume of the warning tone that is output via  
the built-in speaker or earphones. Turning this knob to the  
minimum setting mutes the alarm tone.  
ALARM  
Minimum  
Maximum  
c OUTPUT /DCC (output signal/dynamic contrast  
control) switch  
Switches the video signal, which is output to the VTR part,  
viewfinder, and video monitor from the camera part,  
between the following two.  
h LCD monitor  
Displays VTR-related warnings, remaining battery  
capacity, remaining tape capacity, audio levels, time data,  
and so on.  
BARS: Outputs the color bar signal.  
CAM: Outputs the video signal from the camera. When  
this is selected, you can switch DCC* on and off.  
* DCC (Dynamic Contrast Control): Against a very bright background  
with the iris opening adjusted to the subject, objects in the background will  
be lost in the glare. The DCC function will suppress the high intensity and  
restore much of the lost detail and is particularly effective in the following  
cases.  
i MENU switch  
When flicking toward ON, the USER menu is displayed.  
When flicking toward STATUS, the status of the  
camcorder (of current settings) is displayed.  
Shooting people in the shade on a sunny day  
Shooting a subject indoors, against a background through a window  
Any high contrast scene  
OUTPUT: BARS, DCC: OFF  
A color bar signal is output and the DCC circuit does not  
operate. Use this setting to adjust the video monitor, to  
record the color bar signal, etc.  
j WHITE BAL (white balance memory) switch  
Controls adjustment of the white balance.  
PRST: Adjusts the color temperature to the preset value.  
Use this setting when you have no time to adjust the  
white balance.  
OUTPUT: CAM, DCC: OFF  
The video signal from the camera is output, and  
OUTPUT  
the DCC circuit does not operate.  
BARS  
CAM  
A or B: When the AUTO W/B BAL switch (page 9) is  
pushed to WHT, the white balance is automatically  
adjusted according to the current position of the  
FILTER selector (page 9), and the adjusted value is  
stored in either memory A or memory B. There are  
two memories for each CC filter, allowing a total of  
eight adjustments to be stored. When this switch is set  
to A or B, the camcorder automatically adjusts itself  
to the stored value corresponding to the current  
settings of this switch and the FILTER selector.  
You can use the AUTO W/B BAL switch even when  
ATW* is in use.  
B (ATW): When this switch is set to B and WHITE  
SWITCH <B> is set to ATW on the FUNCTION 2  
page of the OPERATION menu, ATW is activated.  
When this switch is adjusted, the new setting appears  
on the setting change/adjustment progress message  
display area of the viewfinder screen for about 3  
seconds. You can assign the ATW function to the  
ASSIGN switch on the FUNCTION 1 page of the  
OPERATION menu.  
OUTPUT: CAM, DCC: ON  
The video signal from the camera is output, and  
the DCC circuit operates.  
OFF  
ON  
DCC  
d GAIN switch  
Switches the gain of the video amplifier to match the  
lighting conditions during shooting. The gains  
corresponding to the L, M, and H settings can be selected  
in the menu. (The factory settings are L = 0 dB, M = 9 dB,  
and H = 18 dB.)  
When this switch is adjusted, the new setting appears on  
the setting change/adjustment progress message display  
area of the viewfinder screen for about 3 seconds.  
e POWER switch  
Turns the main power supply on and off.  
f MONITOR (monitor volume adjustment) knob  
Controls the volume of the sound other than the warning  
tone that is output via the built-in speaker or earphones.  
Turning this knob to the minimum setting mutes the audio  
output.  
For details about how to assign the function to the ASSIGN  
* ATW (Auto Tracing White Balance): The white balance of the picture  
being shot is adjusted automatically for varying lighting conditions.  
11  
Location and Function of Parts  
                     
Left side of the LCD monitor  
1 LCD button  
2 RESET button  
3 DISPLAY button  
4 DISP SEL button  
a LCD button  
Controls the LCD monitor. Each time pressing this button,  
the setting changes as follows.  
d DISP SEL (display selection) button  
Each time pressing this button, the display in the LCD  
monitor changes as follows.  
L: The LCD monitor is adjusted for viewing indoors.  
H: The LCD monitor is adjusted for viewing outdoors.  
OFF: The LCD monitor is turned off.  
CHAR: Displays video with superimposed text. With the  
MENU switch set to STATUS, also display  
camcorder status indications similar to those  
displayed in the viewfinder.  
b RESET (counter reset) button  
MONI: Displays video without superimposed text.  
STATUS: Displays counter, warnings, audio levels, etc.  
Resets the display of the time data when the LCD monitor  
display is set to STATUS with the DISP SEL button.  
According to the settings of the PRESET/REGEN/  
CLOCK switch (page 14) and the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN  
switch (page 14), resets the display as follows.  
Settings of the button and the To reset  
switch  
DISPLAY button: COUNTER  
Counter to 0:00:00  
DISPLAY button: TC  
PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK  
switch: PRESET  
Time code to  
00:00:00:00  
F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch: SET  
DISPLAY button: U-BIT  
PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK  
switch: PRESET  
User bit data* to 00 00  
00 00  
F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch: SET  
* One of the time code bits recorded on a tape can be used to record the  
necessary information for the user.  
c DISPLAY (counter display toggle) button  
Each time this button is pressed, the counter display  
section changes as follows. This setting is activated only  
when the LCD monitor display is set to STATUS with the  
DISP SEL button.  
COUNTER: Displays the elapsed recording/playback  
time.  
TC: Displays time code.  
U-BIT: Displays user bit data.  
12  
Location and Function of Parts  
         
Rear section  
1 PLAY button  
and indicator  
2 REW button  
REW  
REV  
PLAY  
FWD  
F FWD  
STOP  
4 F FWD button and indicator  
and indicator  
5 STOP button  
EDIT  
SEARCH  
3 EDIT SEARCH  
+FWD/–REV  
buttons  
6 WARNING indicator  
7 TAPE indicator  
8 Built-in speaker  
9 AUDIO adjustment cover  
0 EARPHONE jack  
a PLAY button and indicator  
For details about the meaning of the lights displayed, see  
Press to view a playback image using the viewfinder or a  
LCD monitor. The indicator lights during playback.  
Pressing this button again during playback pauses the  
playback, showing a still image. At this time, the indicator  
flashes. This camcorder is capable of color-image search at  
approximately nine-times (NTSC system) or eleven-times  
(PAL system) normal playback speed, making it easy to  
check recorded material. To use the color-image search,  
press and hold the REW or F FWD button during  
playback. While the button is pressed, the PLAY indicator  
and the REW or F FWD indicator light.  
g TAPE indicator  
Lights up as below depending on the situation.  
Continuous: When the cassette is in the camcorder.  
Blinking: While the cassette is loading or ejecting.  
Lights-out: When the cassette is not in the camcorder.  
h Built-in speaker  
The speaker can be used to monitor E-E sound during  
*
recording, and playback sound during playback. The  
speaker also sounds alarms to reinforce visual warnings.  
If you connect earphones to the EARPHONE jack, the  
speaker is automatically muted.  
b REW button and indicator  
Rewinds the tape. The indicator lights while the tape is  
being rewound.  
* E-E: Abbreviation of “Electric-to-Electric.” In E-E mode, video and audio  
signals input to the camcorder are output after passing through internal  
electric circuits only. This can be used to check input signals.  
c EDIT SEARCH +FWD/–REV buttons  
Press these buttons in recording pause mode or in stop  
mode to find the next recording start point quickly. You  
can search in playback while pressing either of these  
buttons, or you can search by frame when pressing the  
button and releasing it immediately. If you do not operate  
the camcorder for about three seconds after releasing the  
buttons, the camcorder will enter the REC standby mode at  
the point where the buttons were released.  
For information about alarms, see “Operation Warnings”  
i AUDIO adjustment cover  
Open to reveal the audio setting switches (page 14) and  
make audio adjustments.  
j EARPHONE jack (monaural)  
d F FWD button and indicator  
Fast forwards the tape. The indicator lights while the tape  
is being fast forwarded.  
Plugging earphones, and you can monitor the E-E sound  
during recording and playback sound during playback.  
When an alarm is indicated, you can hear the alarm sound  
through the earphones. Plugging earphones into the jack  
automatically cuts off the sound from built-in speaker.  
e STOP button  
Stops playing, rewinding, or fast forwarding the tape.  
f WARNING indicator  
Lights up or blinks when an abnormality occurs in the  
VTR section.  
13  
Location and Function of Parts  
                       
Operation panel under the AUDIO adjustment cover  
5 Arrow key  
1 MONITOR OUT  
CHARACTER switch  
AUDIO LEVEL  
2 MONITOR SELECT  
CH-1  
MIX  
ON  
OFF  
6 AUDIO LEVEL controls  
switch  
CH-2  
MONITOR MONITOR OUT  
SELECT CHARACTER  
7 F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch  
PRESET  
REGEN  
CLOCK  
F-RUN  
SET  
R-RUN  
AUTO  
MANUAL  
8 AUDIO SELECT switches  
3 PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK  
AUDIO SELECT  
switch  
CH-1  
CH-1  
LITHIUM BATT  
REC  
TRIGGER  
FRONT MIC  
LOW OUT  
AUDIO IN  
PARALLEL  
INT ONLY  
EXT ONLY  
FRONT  
WRR  
REAR  
9 AUDIO IN switches  
ON  
OFF  
4 Lithium battery compartment  
0 REC TRIGGER switch  
qa FRONT MIC LOW CUT switch  
a MONITOR OUT (monitor output) CHARACTER  
when the AUDIO SELECT (CH-1/CH-2) switches (see  
below) are set to MANUAL.  
switch  
Selects to superimpose text information on the monitor  
output.  
g F-RUN/SET/R-RUN (free run/set/recording run)  
switch  
b MONITOR SELECT (audio monitor selection)  
switch  
Selects audio output via the built-in speaker or earphones.  
CH-1: Channel 1 audio  
MIX: Mixed audio (channels 1 and 2)  
CH-2: Channel 2 audio  
Selects the operating mode for the internal time code  
generator. The operating mode is set as explained below,  
depending on the position of the switch.  
F-RUN: Time code keeps advancing, regardless of the  
operating state of the VTR. Use this setting when  
synchronizing the time code with an external time  
code.  
c PRESET/REGEN (regeneration)/CLOCK switch  
Selects whether to set a new time code or to utilize the  
existing time code.  
SET: Sets the time code or user bits.  
R-RUN: The time code value advances only during  
recording. Use this setting to have a consecutive time  
code on the tape.  
PRESET: Records a new time code.  
REGEN: Records time code continuous with the existing  
time code recorded on the tape. Regardless of the  
setting of the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch, the  
camcorder operates in R-RUN mode.  
CLOCK: Records time code synchronized to the internal  
clock. Regardless of the setting of the F-RUN/SET/R-  
RUN switch, the camcorder operates in F-RUN mode.  
h AUDIO SELECT (CH-1/CH-2) (audio channel 1/2  
adjustment method selection) switches  
Select the audio level adjustment method for each of audio  
channels 1 and 2.  
d Lithium battery compartment  
Attach the supplied CR2032 Lithium Battery.  
AUTO: Automatic adjustment  
MANUAL: Manual adjustment  
Details on how to attach the lithium battery, see  
27.  
e Arrow key  
Sets the time code and the user bit. Push the key towards  
left or right so that the digit you want to change flashes.  
Pushing the key upward increases the value of the flashing  
digit, and pushing it downward decreases the value.  
f AUDIO LEVEL (CH-1/CH-2) (audio channel 1/2  
recording level) controls  
If the audio is input via the AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2  
connectors, adjusts the audio levels of channels 1 and 2  
14  
Location and Function of Parts  
                     
i AUDIO IN (CH-1/CH-2) (audio channel 1/2 input  
selection) switches  
• Audio fade-in/fade-out  
Select either ON or OFF.  
Select the audio input signals to be recorded on audio  
channels 1 and 2. The audio input is sourced as explained  
below based on the position of the switches.  
FRONT: The microphone connected to the MIC IN (+48  
V) connector (page 16)  
WRR: A WRR-855 UHF Synthesized Tuner Unit (not  
supplied)  
REAR: Audio equipment connected to the AUDIO IN  
CH-1/CH-2 connectors (page 18)  
j REC TRIGGER (external VTR trigger) switch  
Sets the function of the REC button on the camcorder or  
the VTR button on the lens when an external VTR is  
connected to the (i.LINK) DV OUT connector (page  
18). Set this switch to INT ONLY when you need to do cut  
editing or dubbing using the (i.LINK) DV OUT  
connector.  
PARALLEL: Operates both internal and external VTRs  
simultaneously.  
The following settings can be made on the AUDIO page of  
the MAINTENANCE menu.  
INT ONLY: Operates the internal VTR only. External  
VTR operation is performed locally.  
• Audio recording format  
EXT ONLY: Operates the external VTR only.  
Select either Fs48K or 32K.  
• Audio reference level  
Select either –12 dB or –20 dB (DSR-400/450WS), –12  
dB or –18 dB (DSR-400P/450WSP).  
k FRONT MIC LOW CUT switch  
Set to ON to insert a high-pass filter in the microphone  
circuit, reducing wind noise. Normally leave the switch in  
the OFF position.  
Left and upper view  
Front section  
1 Accessory shoe  
4 Shoulder strap fitting  
2 ASSIGN 3/4 switches  
5 Viewfinder left-to-right positioning ring  
6 Viewfinder fitting shoe  
3 Viewfinder front-to-  
back position locking  
knob  
7 LIGHT connector  
8 MIC IN connector  
9 Fitting for optional microphone  
holder  
a Accessory shoe  
Attach an optional accessory such as a video light (page  
33).  
c Viewfinder front-to-back position locking knob  
Loosen this knob to adjust the front-to-back position of the  
viewfinder (page 30).  
b ASSIGN 3/4 switches  
You can assign the desired functions on the FUNCTION 1  
d Shoulder strap fitting  
Attach the supplied shoulder strap (page 32).  
page of the OPERATION menu.  
e Viewfinder left-to-right positioning ring  
Loosen this ring to adjust the left-to-right position of the  
viewfinder (page 30).  
15  
Location and Function of Parts  
                 
f Viewfinder fitting shoe  
Attach the DXF-801 Viewfinder.  
h MIC IN (microphone input) (+48V) connector  
(XLR type, 3-pin, female)  
Connect the supplied microphone to this connector. A  
microphone other than the one supplied may also be  
connected as long as it can operate with power source  
supplied by external equipment. The power (+48 V) is  
supplied via this connector.  
g LIGHT (video light) connector (2-pin, female)  
A video light with a maximum power consumption of 50  
W, such as the Anton Bauer Ultralight 2 or equivalent can  
be connected (page 33).  
i Fitting for optional microphone holder  
Fit an optional CAC-12 Microphone Holder (page 34).  
Rear section  
1 Attachment shoe for large  
viewfinder  
4 EJECT switch and tape indicator  
5 Cassette lid  
6 Shoulder pad  
7 TC IN connector  
2 GENLOCK IN connector  
3 MONITOR OUT connector  
8 TC OUT connector  
a Attachment shoe for large viewfinder  
Attach an optional electronic viewfinder (page 31).  
c MONITOR OUT connector  
Outputs a composite video signal for a video monitor.  
Depending on menu settings, menus, time code, and shot  
data can be superimposed on the image on the monitor.  
Like the VIDEO OUT connector (page 18), this connector  
can also be used to synchronize the time code of an  
external VTR with the time code of the camcorder.  
b GENLOCK IN connector (BNC type)  
Use for the following two purposes.  
For DSR-400/400P/450WS/450WSP: Inputs a  
reference signal when the camcorder is to be genlocked  
or when time code is to be synchronized with external  
equipment. Use the GENLOCK page of the  
MAINTENANCE menu to adjust the genlock H-phase  
(phase of horizontal sync signal) and the sub-carrier  
phase.  
For DSR-450WS/450WSP only: Inputs an external  
video signal. Installing a CBK-SC01 Composite Input  
Board allows you to record external analog composite  
video signals input via this connector. Non-standard  
video signals, such as VHS, cannot be recorded.  
d EJECT switch and tape indicator (inside the  
cassette lid)  
Press to eject a cassette when the power is supplied to the  
camcorder. The indicator lights up as below.  
Continuous: When the cassette is in the camcorder.  
Blinking: While the cassette is loading or ejecting.  
Lights-out: When the cassette is not in the camcorder.  
e Cassette lid  
Slide the OPEN lever on the top of the camcorder to open  
the lid. Press the side of the lid to close it.  
16  
Location and Function of Parts  
                       
f Shoulder pad  
g TC IN (time code input) connector (BNC type)  
To synchronize the time code of the camcorder to an  
external time code, connect the camcorder to the external  
equipment with the reference time code using this  
connector.  
You can move the shoulder pad forwards or backwards by  
raising up the shoulder pad locking lever. Do this to ensure  
the best balance when shooting with the camcorder on  
your shoulder.  
For details about how to adjust the pad, see “Adjusting the  
h TC OUT (time code output) connector (BNC type)  
To synchronize the time code of an external VTR to that of  
the camcorder, connect the camcorder to the reference  
time code input connector of the external VTR using this  
connector.  
For details about the time code, see “To set the time code”  
Rear view  
1 TALLY indicator  
2 TALLY switch  
3 Battery attachment interface  
4 DC IN connector  
5 “Memory Stick” slot  
9 WRR connector  
6 REMOTE connector  
(DSR-450WS/  
450WSP only)  
0
i.LINK (DV OUT) connector  
7 DC OUT 12 V connector  
qa AUDIO OUT CH-1/CH-2 connectors  
8 AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 connectors  
qs VIDEO OUT connector (DSR-  
and input selection switches  
450WS/450WSP only)  
a TALLY (back tally) indicator (red)  
For details about how to attach the battery and AC  
information about attaching a synthesized tuner, see  
Lights up during recording. It will not light if the TALLY  
switch (see below) is set to OFF. This indicator also blinks  
to indicate warnings (page 13) in the same manner as the  
REC/TALLY indicator in the viewfinder.  
Note  
For your safety, and to ensure proper operation of the  
camcorder, Sony recommends the use of the following  
battery packs: BP-GL65, BP-GL95, and BP-L60S.  
b TALLY switch  
Set to ON to activate the TALLY indicator (see above)  
function.  
d DC IN connector (XLR type, 4-pin, male)  
To operate the camcorder using an AC power supply,  
connect an AC-550 AC Adaptor with the DC output cable  
supplied with the adaptor.  
c Battery attachment interface  
Attach a BP-GL65/GL95/L60S battery pack. Furthermore,  
by attaching an AC-DN10 AC Adaptor, you can operate  
the camcorder using an AC power supply.  
17  
Location and Function of Parts  
               
e “Memory Stick” slot  
i WRR connector (7-pin)  
Connect a CA-WR855 Camera Adaptor with attached  
WRR-855 UHF Synthesizer Tuner.  
j
(i.LINK) DV OUT connector (6-pin, IEEE1394  
compliant)  
“Memory Stick”  
access indicator  
“Memory Stick”  
Connect to a device supporting the DV format or a  
computer, using i.LINK cable (DV cable).  
Insert a “Memory Stick”. The “Memory Stick” access  
indicator lights up when the “Memory Stick” is being  
accessed for reading or writing.  
Notes  
• If video and audio signals from an external device  
connected to the (i.LINK) DV OUT connector are not  
output, disconnect the i.LINK cable (DV cable) and then  
reconnect it, making sure that it is firmly seated.  
For details about how to insert a “Memory Stick”, see “To  
• When you connect the camcorder and other equipment,  
such as a hard disk drive, with an i.LINK interface to a  
computer with i.LINK connectors, turn off the power of  
the computer, the other equipment, and the camcorder  
before connecting them using the i.LINK cable (DV  
cable). If a bus-powered type* hard disk drive or similar  
equipment is connected while the computer is powered  
on, electric current flows into the camcorder because of  
the high voltage caused by the load shift of the computer  
power, and this may cause a malfunction.  
For details about the types of “Memory Stick”, see “About  
Note  
Do not remove a “Memory Stick” while the “Memory  
Stick” access indicator is lit. Doing so may cause a loss of  
data.  
f REMOTE connector (8-pin) (DSR-450WS/  
450WSP only)  
Connect a RM-B150/B750 Remote Control Unit, which  
* Equipment that can be powered through i.LINK cable (DV cable)  
makes it possible to control the camcorder remotely.  
k AUDIO OUT CH-1/CH-2 (audio output channel 1/  
2) connectors (pin jacks)  
Output the sound being recorded or played back. Connect  
to a stereo amplifier or video monitor’s audio input  
connectors.  
g DC OUT 12 V (DC power output) connector (4-pin,  
female)  
Supplies power for a WRR-861/862 UHF Synthesizer  
Tuner (optional) (maximum 0.2 A).  
Do not connect any equipment other than the UHF  
synthesizer tuner.  
l VIDEO OUT connector (BNC type)  
(DSR-450WS/450WSP only)  
Outputs a composite video signal for a video monitor.  
With a video monitor connected to this connector, you can  
monitor the picture being shot by the camera or the picture  
played back by the VTR. When synchronizing the time  
code of an external VTR with that of the camcorder,  
connect this connector to the GEN LOCK IN connector of  
the external VTR. By installing the CBK-SD01 SDI  
Output Board (optional), you can output an SDI signal  
(supporting embedded audio and the EDH function) from  
this connector. To switch the composite video signal  
output to SDI signal output, use the menu.  
h AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 (audio input channel 1/2)  
connectors (XLR-3 pin, female) and input selection  
switches  
Connect other audio equipment or external microphone.  
Set the input selection switches as shown below according  
to the microphone or equipment.  
MIC +48V ON (right position): For connecting to a 48 V  
microphone  
MIC (center position): For connecting any microphone  
other than 48 V microphone  
LINE (left position): For connecting an external audio  
signal source such as a stereo amplifier  
For details on how to select the output signal, see  
Note  
If MIC +48V ON is selected for a microphone other than  
48 V microphone, the microphone may be damaged.  
18  
Location and Function of Parts  
                       
Lens  
VCL-917BY Zoom Lens (DSR-400K/400PK only)  
8 Iris ring  
1 F.f adjustment ring and F.f fixing knob  
2 MACRO selector  
9 RET button  
0 Motorized zoom lever  
3 Zoom ring  
qa Iris mode selector  
4 Focus ring  
Lens hood  
qs Instant automatic iris  
adjustment button  
5 ZOOM selector  
qd VTR button  
6 Focal servo module connector  
7 Zoom remote control connector  
qf MACRO ring  
a F.f (flange focal length) adjustment ring and F.f  
fixing knob  
For details of the lens remote control unit, please contact  
Fuji Photo Optical Co., Ltd. (FUJINON)  
F.f adjustment ring: To adjust the flange focal length,  
loosen the F.f fixing knob, then turn the ring (page  
28).  
h Iris ring  
Turn this ring for manual iris control. Set the Iris mode  
F.f fixing knob: Fixes the F.f adjustment ring.  
selector (see below) to the M position beforehand.  
b MACRO (close-up) selector  
Turn the MACRO ring while pressing and holding this  
button for close-up work.  
i RET (return) button  
Use to check the recorded image. When the internal VTR  
is in recording pause mode, press this button to review the  
last few seconds of the recording in the viewfinder  
(recording review).  
c Zoom ring  
Turn this ring for direct manual zoom control. Set the  
ZOOM selector (see below) to the M position beforehand.  
d Focus ring  
Turn this ring to focus the lens on the subject.  
j Motorized zoom lever  
Press further to increase the zoom speed. Press only  
e ZOOM selector  
Selects the mode of zoom operation.  
S: Power zoom  
slightly to decrease the zoom speed.  
k Iris mode selector  
This selects the mode of iris operation.  
A: Automatic iris  
M: Manual zoom  
f Focal servo module connector  
M: Manual iris  
Attach a servo module to drive focal adjustment.  
l Instant automatic iris adjustment button  
While using manual iris control, press to switch  
temporarily to automatic iris control setting. Automatic  
control is maintained as long as you hold the button down.  
g Zoom remote control connector (8-pin)  
Connect an optional lens remote control unit for remote  
control of zooming.  
19  
Location and Function of Parts  
                           
m VTR button  
This button starts and stops recording on the VTR. Press it  
n MACRO (close-up) ring  
For close-up, turn this ring while holding the MACRO  
once to start recording, and once more to stop.  
selector down.  
In the recording pause state, the camcorder waits for a  
certain period of time in the standby-on mode and then  
automatically switches to standby-off mode. This length of  
the standby-on period with no operation can be set to  
either 1 minute, 3 minutes, or 5 minutes on the VTR MODE  
page of the MAINTENANCE menu.  
DXF-801 Viewfinder  
6 TALLY indicator  
7 REC/TALLY indicators  
1 Eyepiece focusing knob  
TALLY REC BATT  
8 BATT indicator  
2 Stopper  
9 GAIN UP indicator  
Microphone fixing screw  
Microphone holder  
SHUTTER  
GAIN UP  
0 SHUTTER indicator  
Microphone  
Eye cup  
3 PEAKING control  
qa Tally lamp  
4 CONTRAST  
qs Eyepiece release catch  
control  
qd BRIGHT control  
5 LIGHT switch and light  
qf Viewfinder connector  
HIGH LOW OFF  
qg TALLY switch  
LIGHT  
qh DISPLAY switch  
c PEAKING control  
Adjusts the outline intensity of the viewfinder image (page  
Note  
You can switch the scan size of the DXF-801 in  
accordance with the aspect ratio selected on the camera or  
camcorder. It operates in 4:3 mode when connected to the  
DSR-400/400P. It operates in either 4:3 or 16:9 mode  
when connected to the DSR-450WS/450WSP.  
30).  
d CONTRAST control  
Adjusts the contrast of the viewfinder image (page 30).  
e LIGHT switch and light  
The light lights the lens and the switch controls the light as  
follows.  
a Eyepiece focusing knob  
Adjusts the viewfinder focus to match your eyesight (page  
30).  
HIGH: Brighter  
LOW: Darker  
OFF: Turns the light off.  
b Stopper  
Lift up when detaching the viewfinder (page 31).  
20  
Location and Function of Parts  
                 
f TALLY (tally) indicator (green)  
Flashes when the camcorder is in Interval Rec mode.  
Flashing quickens while you are shooting in Interval Rec  
mode.  
Status display on the viewfinder  
screen  
The viewfinder screen displays not only the video picture  
but also characters and messages indicating the camcorder  
settings and operating status, a center marker, a safety zone  
marker, etc.  
For details on Interval Rec mode, see “Time-Lapse Video  
When the MENU switch is set to OFF and the DISPLAY  
switch is set to ON, the items for which an ON setting was  
made in the VF DISP 1 page of the OPERATION menu or  
with related switches are displayed at the top and bottom  
of the screen.  
The messages that give details of the settings and  
adjustment progress and results can also be made to appear  
for about 3 seconds while settings are being changed,  
during adjustment, and after adjustment.  
g REC/TALLY (recording/tally) indicators (red)  
Functions as follows.  
• Flashes from the time when you press the REC button on  
the camcorder or the VTR button on the lens until  
recording starts, then stay on continuously during  
recording.  
• Indicates a fault (page 125).  
The lower indicator can also function by setting in the  
menu (page 87).  
For details about the display item selection, see “Selecting  
the display items” on page 98. For details about setting  
change and adjustment progress messages, see “Display  
progress messages” on page 99. For details about marker  
h BATT (battery) indicator (red)  
Lights up when the battery capacity is low.  
i GAIN UP indicator (orange)  
Lights up when the gain is 3 dB or more.  
j SHUTTER indicator (red)  
Lights up when the SHUTTER switch (page 10) is ON.  
Layout of the status display on the  
viewfinder screen  
All items that can be displayed on the viewfinder screen  
are shown below.  
k Tally lamp  
When the TALLY switch (see below) is in the ON  
position, this operates in the same way as the REC/TALLY  
indicators.  
EX  
REC  
3. 2K  
PARA  
16. 0V  
DC IN  
l Eyepiece release catch  
To view the viewfinder screen directly, press to hinge up  
the eyepiece.  
24  
4: 3  
DSR-400  
#30001  
05/ 03/23 01:43  
SHOT ID(1 - 4)  
16: 9  
m BRIGHT (brightness) control  
Adjusts the brightness of the viewfinder image (page 30).  
WHITE NG  
LEVEL TOO HIGH  
TCG 00 : 00 : 00 : 00  
LOW LIGHT  
EXT  
IV  
DVCAM  
n Viewfinder connector (20-pin)  
D5600  
Connect to the VF connector (page 9).  
1
15-10 F5.6  
W:A  
0dB 1/1000  
o TALLY switch  
Set to the ON position to use the tally lamp.  
6, 7, wa, ws, and wd appear only when color bars are displayed.  
p DISPLAY switch  
a VTR operation indicators  
Set to OFF when you want to remove the character data  
from the viewfinder and the monitor connected to the  
MONITOR OUT connector (page 14).  
VTR operation is displayed as follows:  
REC1: The internal VTR is operating.  
REC2: The external VTR connected to the (i.LINK)  
DV OUT connecter is operating.  
1
REC : Both the internal VTR and the external VTR  
2
connected to the (i.LINK) DV OUT connector are  
operating.  
21  
Location and Function of Parts  
                             
b Trigger mode  
k Iris setting/auto iris override  
PARA: Operates both internal and external VTRs.  
INT: Operates the internal VTR only.  
EXT: Operates the external VTR only.  
Indicates the F value (iris setting) of the lens.  
Also, the auto iris override is displayed using two squares  
which appear in the upper and lower parts respectively.  
c Extender  
“EX” is displayed when a lens extender is used.  
l Remaining tape capacity  
Indicates the remaining tape recording time (in minutes) of  
the VTR.  
d Color temperature  
Indicates the currently selected color temperature.  
Examples of remaining tape recording time indication  
e DC IN / battery voltage / remaining capacity  
Indicates the battery voltage or the remaining capacity of  
an attached internal battery pack, an AC adaptor, or an  
external battery (a battery connected to the DC IN  
connector).  
When the power is supplied from an external battery, “DC  
IN” appears here.  
When the DISP BATT REMAIN item is set to INT on the  
VF DISP 2 page of the OPERATION menu, the battery  
voltage is not indicated.  
Indication  
F - 30  
Remaining tape recording time  
Full to 30 minutes  
30 to 25 minutes  
25 to 20 minutes  
20 to 15 minutes  
15 to 10 minutes  
10 to 5 minutes  
30 - 25  
25 - 20  
20 - 15  
15 - 10  
10 - 5  
However, when the Anton Bauer intelligent battery system  
or the BP-GL65/GL95 battery pack is used, the remaining  
battery capacity is automatically detected and indicated in  
steps of 10%.  
• Until the remaining battery capacity is reduced to 40%,  
the indications MAX, 90%, 80%...40% are displayed for  
three seconds in the viewfinder each time the remaining  
battery capacity reduces by 10%.  
5 - 0  
5 to 0 minutes  
No display  
0 minute  
m Audio level  
Indicates the level of audio channel 1 and channel 2. The  
peak indication of the VTR level meter is related as  
follows to the audio level when an 1kHz sine wave is input.  
• When the remaining battery capacity is less than 40%,  
the indication is displayed all the time.  
• When the remaining battery capacity is less than 10% ,  
the indication flashes. When the remaining battery  
capacity is reduced further, the “LOW” flashes.  
Audio channel 1 level  
indicator  
*
Audio channel 2 level  
indicator  
VTR level meter  
indicator  
* This value can be set to either 10% or 20% on the FUNCTION 2 page of  
the OPERATION menu.  
n Operation/error message display area  
f * (Asterisk indicator)  
Flashes when the color bars are displayed and is recorded  
together with the color bars.  
o Shutter speed  
Indicates the shutter speed or the shutter mode. However,  
if the SHUTTER switch (page 10) is set to OFF, nothing is  
displayed.  
1/100, 1/125, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000: Shutter speed  
(in seconds) in standard mode (scan mode: I)  
1/40, 1/60, 1/120, 1/125, 1/250, 1/500, 1/1000, 1/2000:  
Shutter speed (in seconds) in standard mode (scan  
mode: PsF)  
ECS: In ECS (Extended Clear Scan) mode  
EVS: In EVS (Super Enhanced Vertical Definition  
System) mode  
1F to 8F, 16F (DSR-450WS/450WSP only): Number of  
frames in the slow speed shutter mode  
g 16:9 mode recording indicator (DSR-450WS/  
450WSP only)  
Indicates recording in the 16:9 mode. This indicator is  
recorded together with the color bars.  
h Setting change and adjustment progress message  
display area  
i EXT/IV indicator (DSR-450WS/450WSP only)  
Displayed when a CBK-SC01 Composite Input Board is  
installed for input of external composite signals.  
p Gain  
j Recording format  
Indicates the current recording format.  
Indicates the gain of the video amplifier, as set by the  
GAIN switch.  
22  
Location and Function of Parts  
                             
q White balance memory  
Indicates the currently selected white balance automatic  
adjustment memory.  
A: Displayed when the WHITE BAL switch is set to A.  
B: Displayed when the WHITE BAL switch is set to B.  
P: Displayed when the WHITE BAL switch is set to PRST  
or when the preset button on an RM-B150 has been  
pushed.  
Status display on the LCD monitor  
The following display appears when the LCD monitor  
display is set to STATUS with the DISP SEL button.  
T: Displayed when ATW is being used.  
r Filter  
Indicates the currently selected filter types.  
s 5600 indicator  
Appears when the electric color temperature filter function  
is on.  
t Time code  
Indicates the elapsed recording/playback time, the time  
code, user bits or other information selected by the  
DISPLAY switch (page 21).  
a Video format  
Indicates the video format of the image that is currently  
playing or being recorded.  
DVCAM: The video format is set to DVCAM mode.  
DV-SP: The video format is set to DV-SP mode.  
u ID number  
Indicates the ID number selected from ID 1 to ID 4 when  
the color bars are displayed. The ID number is recorded  
together with the color bars.  
b Playback indicator  
Appears during playback.  
v Date and time  
c Camera scan mode indicator  
Indicates the date and time of recording when the color  
bars are displayed, which are recorded together with the  
color bars.  
Indicates the camera scan mode of the image that is  
currently playing back or being recorded.  
For DSR-400/450WS only  
60i: 60 fields per second, interlace scan mode  
30P: 30 frames per second, progressive scan mode  
24P 2.3: 24 frames per second, progressive scan mode  
(converted to 60i at 2-3 pulldown)  
24P 2.3.3.2: 24 frame per second, progressive scan  
mode (converted to 60i at 2-3-3-2 pulldown)  
w Model name and serial number  
Indicates the model name and serial number of the  
camcorder when the color bars are displayed, which are  
recorded together with the color bars.  
x 16:9/4:3 mode  
“16:9” or “4:3” is displayed depending on the currently  
selected aspect ratio.  
For DSR-400P/450WSP only  
50i: 50 fields per second, interlace scan mode  
25P: 25 frames per second, progressive scan mode  
Note  
The 16:9 mode can be selected for the DSR-450WS/  
450WSP.  
Note  
There may be no indication displayed when this unit  
cannot identify the camera scan mode, for example, when  
playing back a tape recorded with other equipment.  
d Non drop-frame mode indicator (DSR-400/450WS  
only)  
Appears when non-drop frame mode is selected.  
e External synchronization indicator  
Appears when the internal time code generator is locked to  
an external signal input to the TC IN connector.  
23  
Location and Function of Parts  
                                 
f Audio format  
Indicates the audio format of image that is currently  
g Hold indicator  
Appears when the internal time code generator is stopped.  
playing or being recorded.  
32k: 12 bit Fs32K (4ch mode)  
44.1k: 16 bit Fs44.1K (2ch mode)  
48k: 16 bit Fs48K (2ch mode)  
h Audio level indicators  
Indicates the audio recording or playback levels of channel  
1 and channel 2.  
i Lithium backup battery warning  
Note  
Appears when the voltage of the internal lithium backup  
battery (CR2032) is low. If this indication appears, replace  
the lithium backup battery immediately (page 29).  
Recording in 16 bit Fs32K and 16 bit Fs44.1K are not  
possible on the camcorder.  
j Battery capacity indicator  
Indication  
Battery voltage  
BP-L60S/L90A/L60A/L90/L60 BP-90A/NP-1B  
Other batteries  
17.0V or more  
16.0 to 17.0V  
15.0 to 16.0V  
14.0 to 15.0V  
13.0 to 14.0V  
12.0 to 13.0V  
11.0V to 12.0V  
11.0V or less  
BATT E [ ■■■■■■■ ] F  
15.5V or more  
15.1 to 15.5V  
14.6 to 15.1V  
13.8 to 14.6V  
12.9 to 13.8V  
12.0 to 12.9V  
10.8 to 12.0V  
10.8V or less  
12.0V or more  
11.7 to 12.0V  
11.5 to 11.7V  
11.3 to 11.5V  
11.1 to 11.3V  
10.9 to 11.1V  
10.5 to 10.9V  
10.5V or less  
BATT E [ ■■■■■■ ] F  
BATT E [ ■■■■■  
BATT E [ ■■■■  
BATT E [ ■■■  
BATT E [ ■■  
BATT E [ ■  
] F  
] F  
] F  
] F  
] F  
] F  
BATT E [  
Indication  
Battery voltage  
BP-IL75/GL65/GL95/  
M100/M50, Anton Bauer  
Battery System  
BATT E [ ■■■■■■■ ] F  
80 to 100%  
70%  
BATT E [ ■■■■■■■ ]  
BATT E [ ■■■■■■  
BATT E [ ■■■■■  
BATT E [ ■■■■  
BATT E [ ■■■  
BATT E [ ■■  
]
60%  
]
50%  
]
40%  
]
30%  
]
20%  
BATT E [ ■  
]
10%  
BATT E [  
]
0%  
k Tape remaining indicator  
Indication  
Tape time remaining  
30 minutes  
TAPE E [ ■■■■■■■ ] B  
TAPE E [ ■■■■■■ ] B  
25 to 30 minutes  
20 to 25 minutes  
15 to 20 minutes  
10 to 15 minutes  
5 to 10 minutes  
2 to 5 minutes  
TAPE E [ ■■■■■  
TAPE E [ ■■■■  
TAPE E [ ■■■  
TAPE E [ ■■  
TAPE E [ ■  
] B  
] B  
] B  
] B  
] B  
TAPE E [ ■  
] B (flashing) 0 to 2 minutes  
] B (flashing) 0  
TAPE E [  
24  
Location and Function of Parts  
     
l Warning indicators  
Displays warnings when trouble with recording or  
moisture condensation occurs.  
Using the CD-ROM  
Manual  
m Time counter indicator  
The supplied CD-ROM includes versions of the Operating  
Instructions for the DSR-400/400P/450WS/450WSP in  
English, French, German, Italian, and Spanish.  
Each press of the DISPLAY button switches displays of  
time code, user bit, and counter. You can display the date  
or time using the arrow key under the AUDIO adjustment  
cover.  
TCG: Value of time code generator  
TCR: Value of time code reader  
UBG: Value of user bit generator  
UBR: Value of user bit reader  
CNT: Counter indicator  
CLK: Current time data  
CD-ROM system requirements  
The following are required to access the supplied CD-  
ROM disc.  
• Computer: PC with Intel Pentium CPU  
- Installed memory: 64 MB or more  
DAT: Current date  
- CD-ROM drive: ×8 or faster  
• Monitor: Monitor supporting resolution of 800 × 600 or  
higher  
TCG and UBG can be displayed when the tape is stopped  
and during recording, and TCR and UBR are displayed  
during playback.  
• Operating system: Microsoft Windows Millennium  
Edition, Windows 2000 Service Pack 2, Windows XP  
Professional or Windows XP Home Edition  
When these requirements are not met, access to the CD-  
ROM disc may be slow, or not possible at all.  
CLK can be displayed when the center of the arrow key is  
pressed while TC is being displayed by pressing the  
DISPLAY button.  
DAT can be displayed when the center of the arrow key is  
pressed while U-BIT is being displayed by pressing the  
DISPLAY button.  
Preparations  
One of the following programs must be installed on your  
computer in order to use the operation manuals contained  
on the CD-ROM disc.  
• Adobe Acrobat Reader Version 4.0 or higher  
• Adobe Reader Version 6.0 or higher  
Note  
If Adobe Reader is not installed, you can download it from  
the following URL:  
http://www.adobe.com/  
Reading the CD-ROM manual  
To read the operation manual contained on the CD-ROM  
disc, do the following.  
1
2
Insert the CD-ROM disc in your CD-ROM drive.  
A cover page appears automatically in your browser. If  
it does not appear automatically in the browser,  
double-click the index.htm file on the CD-ROM disc.  
Select and click the operation manual that you want to  
read.  
This opens the PDF file of the operation manual.  
25  
Using the CD-ROM Manual  
                         
Note  
If you lose the CD-ROM disc or become unable to read its  
content, for example because of a hardware failure, you  
can purchase a new CD-ROM disc to replace one that has  
been lost or damaged. Contact your Sony service  
representative.  
• Intel and Pentium are registered trademarks of Intel  
Corporation or its subsidiaries in the United States and  
other countries.  
• Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of  
Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other  
countries.  
• Adobe, Acrobat, and Adobe Reader are trademarks of  
Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States and/  
or other countries.  
26  
Using the CD-ROM Manual  
Preparation  
Chapter  
3
Take out the lithium battery.  
Attaching and Replacing  
the Lithium Battery  
Press down and pull out  
toward you.  
This camcorder uses a lithium battery to retain stored data.  
When using the camcorder for the first time, be sure to  
attach the supplied lithium battery (CR2032). The  
camcorder will not operate correctly without this lithium  
battery. After attaching the lithium battery, set the date and  
time of the internal clock (see “Setting the date/time of the  
4
Reverse step 3 to insert a replacement lithium battery.  
Make sure that the + symbol on the battery is facing  
you.  
5
Close the battery cover.  
Notes  
• Carefully read the instructions for attaching and  
replacing the lithium battery. Lithium batteries can  
explode if misused.  
• Use only CR2032 Lithium Batteries. Other types of  
lithium batteries may come loose when this camcorder is  
moved. If you have difficulty finding CR2032 Lithium  
Batteries, contact your Sony dealer.  
Service life of the lithium battery  
When the lithium battery’s voltage falls, the lithium  
battery power replacement warning appears on the LCD  
monitor (page 24). If this warning appears, replace the  
lithium battery ( Li CR2032) within three or four days.  
The lithium battery has an average service life of about one  
year.  
Catch  
2
Pressandpull  
forward.  
LITHIUM BATT  
Battery cover  
1
1
2
Set the POWER switch to on.  
Press down the catch at the top of the battery cover and  
open the cover.  
27  
Attaching and Replacing the Lithium Battery  
       
Adjusting the flange focal length  
Preparing the Lens  
It is necessary to adjust the flange focal length (the  
distance from the lens flange to the plane of the image  
along the optical axis) in the following cases.  
• When a lens is fitted for the first time  
Mounting the lens  
• After changing lenses  
• When during zoom operations the focus does not match  
properly from telephoto to wide angle  
Mount the lens using the following procedure.  
For information about using the lens, refer to the  
operating instructions for the lens.  
1 7  
4,11 2  
3
Lens mount  
securing rubber  
3
9
8
5
6
M
1
2
Set the iris selector to the M (Manual) position.  
Turn the iris ring to open it.  
5
4 2 1  
1
2
3
Push the lens locking lever up and remove the lens  
mount cap from the lens mount.  
Adjust the light or the ND filter so that an appropriate  
brightness is obtained with the iris open.  
Align the center slot in the lens mount with the center  
pin on the lens, and insert the lens into the mount.  
3
Place the supplied flange focal length adjustment test  
chart at a range of about 3 meters (10 feet), and adjust  
the light so that an appropriate video level is obtained  
with the iris open.  
Holding the lens in place, push the lens locking lever  
down to mount the lens.  
4
5
6
7
8
9
Loosen the F.f fixing knob.  
Note  
If the lens is not firmly locked, it may come off while  
the camcorder is being used. This could cause a serious  
accident. Make sure the lens is firmly locked. It is  
recommended that the lens mount securing rubber be  
put on the lens-locking lever as illustrated above.  
Set the ZOOM selector to the M position.  
Turn the zoom ring to the telephoto position.  
Turn the focus ring so that the test chart is in focus.  
Turn the zoom ring to the wide angle position.  
4
5
Connect the lens cable to the LENS connector.  
Note  
Turn the F.f fixing ring so that the test chart is in focus.  
Do not move the focusing ring.  
Connecting the lens cable to the LENS connector  
when the camcorder is powered may cause a  
malfunction of the camcorder or the lens. Turn off the  
camcorder before connecting the LENS connector.  
10Repeat steps 6 to 9 until the image stays in focus from  
telephoto to wide angle.  
Secure the lens cable with the cable clamps.  
11After adjustment, tighten the screw of the F.f fixing  
knob.  
28  
Preparing the Lens  
           
2
Slide the battery pack down until its “LOCK” arrow  
points at the matching line on the camcorder.  
Preparing a Power Supply  
The following power supplies are recommended for the  
camcorder.  
• BP-GL65/GL95/L60S Lithium-ion Battery Pack  
• AC power using the AC-550, AC-DN2, AC-DN10 AC  
adaptor  
“LOCK” arrow  
Line on the camcorder  
Using a battery pack  
When a BP-GL65/GL95/L60S Battery Pack is used, the  
camcorder will operate continuously for the time shown  
below.  
To detach the battery pack  
Model name  
BP-GL65  
BP-GL95  
BP-L60S  
Operating time  
Approx. 180 minutes  
Approx. 300 minutes  
Approx. 170 minutes  
Holding the button in, pull  
the battery pack up.  
Before use, charge the battery pack with a charger suitable  
for each battery.  
For details on charging procedure, refer to the battery  
charger operation manual.  
Notes  
• During recording, playback, and loading/unloading a  
tape, be careful never to remove the battery pack.  
• Make sure to turn the camcorder off before changing the  
battery (except when using an AC-550 and an AC-DN2/  
DN10 AC adaptor together).  
Note on using the battery pack  
A warm battery pack may not be able to be fully recharged.  
To attach the battery pack  
1
Press the battery pack against the back of the  
camcorder, aligning the line on the side of the battery  
pack with the matching line on the camcorder.  
Using an AC adaptor  
To use the AC-550 AC adaptor  
Connect the camcorder to the AC power supply through an  
AC-550 AC Adaptor as shown in the following figure, and  
turn the POWER switch of the AC-550 on.  
BP-GL65/GL95/L60S  
Align these lines.  
to an AC power source  
Power switch on  
Back of the camcorder  
AC Adaptor  
DC OUT  
AC-550  
DC IN  
DC output cable (supplied with the AC-550)  
29  
Preparing a Power Supply  
                 
To use the AC-DN10 AC adaptor  
Mount an AC-DN10 on the camcorder in the same way as  
a battery pack, then connect to the AC power supply.  
The AC-DN10 can supply up to 100 W of power.  
Adjusting the Viewfinder  
Depending on the eyesight of the operator — whether  
longsighted or shortsighted — the optimal position of the  
viewfinder image varies. Adjusting brightness, contrast,  
and so on, improves the visibility of the viewfinder screen.  
Although these adjustments may make the viewfinder  
image clearer, they have no effect on the output video  
signal from the camcorder.  
to an AC power source  
Fitting the viewfinder  
Avoiding breaks in operation due to  
an exhausted battery  
Remove any microphone from the viewfinder beforehand.  
When the battery pack is becoming exhausted, you can  
perform battery replacement without causing a break to the  
camcorder operation by using an AC adaptor.  
1
Slide the viewfinder into the holder on the camera,  
then tighten the viewfinder left-to-light position fixing  
ring.  
1
2
Turn the AC-550 AC adaptor on.  
Viewfinderleft-to-right  
position fixing ring  
Connect an AC-550 AC Adaptor to an AC power  
source, then connect it to the DC IN connector of the  
camcorder (page 29).  
The power source switches automatically from the  
battery pack to the AC adaptor connected to the DC IN  
connector.  
Note  
There may be some noise on the video signal at the  
time of power source switching.  
2
Connect the viewfinder connector to the VF  
connector.  
3
Replace the battery pack with a fully charged one.  
VF connector  
Note  
Push the connector all the way into the VF connector.  
To remove the viewfinder  
Reverse the fitting procedure. Please note that you should  
slide the viewfinder out while pulling the viewfinder  
stopper up.  
30  
Adjusting the Viewfinder  
             
image for your eyesight. The adjustment range is from –3  
to 0 diopters.  
Using an optional part of the DXF-801 allows you to  
modify the adjustment range to –2 to +1 diopters or – 0.5  
to +3 diopters.  
To use the camcorder with your left eye  
By fitting a left eye adaptor to the DXF-801, you can use  
the camcorder with your left eye to the viewfinder.  
Note  
For details, consult your Sony dealer.  
You cannot stow the camcorder in the carrying case with  
the left-eye adaptor attached.  
To adjust contrast and brightness  
Carry out these adjustments with the color bars displayed.  
For details, consult your Sony dealer.  
1
2
Set the OUTPUT/DCC switch to the BARS position.  
The color bars appear in the viewfinder.  
Adjusting the viewfinder position  
To adjust the viewfinder left-to-right position, loosen the  
left-to-right fixing ring, and to adjust the front-to-back  
position, loosen the front-to-back position locking knob.  
Watching the color bars, turn the CONTRAST and  
BRIGHT controls to adjust the contrast and  
brightness.  
3
Return the OUTPUT/DCC switch to its original  
position.  
Viewfinder left-to-right position  
fixing ring  
To adjust the outline emphasis  
Turning the PEAKING control changes the degree of  
outline emphasis in the viewfinder image, to make  
focusing easier.  
Viewfinder front-to-back  
position locking knob  
Attaching a 5-inch electronic  
viewfinder  
You can attach an optional DXF-51 (5-inch) Electronic  
Viewfinder. To attach it, an Accessory Shoe Kit (part  
number A-8274-968-B) is required.  
Adjusting the eyepiece focus and  
the screen (brightness, contrast,  
and outline emphasis)  
For details, contact your Sony dealer.  
BRIGHT control  
Eyepiece focusing  
Remove the cover of the grip and attach the shoe and  
stopper screw (of the Accessory Shoe Kit).  
knob  
CONTRAST control  
Guide  
Fixing ring  
VF Cable  
PEAKING control  
Shoe*  
Stopper screw*  
OUTPUT/DCC switch  
* Supplied with the Accessory Shoe Kit  
To adjust the eyepiece focus  
First focus the image with the lens, then adjust the  
eyepiece focusing knob to get the clearest viewfinder  
31  
Adjusting the Viewfinder  
             
Using the Shoulder Strap Adjusting the Shoulder  
Pad Position  
1
Fit one of the clips to a shoulder strap fitting.  
You can shift the shoulder pad backward or forward by up  
to 35 mm (1 7/16 inches). This adjustment helps you get the  
best balance for shooting with the camcorder on your  
shoulder.  
g
1,3  
Pull up the strap to lock  
the fitting.  
Clip  
Bottom of the  
camcorder  
2
Fit the other clip to the shoulder strap fitting on the  
other side of the grip in the same way.  
Shoulder pad  
2
1
2
3
Raise the lever in the center of the shoulder pad to  
unlock the shoulder pad.  
Slide the shoulder pad backward or forward until it is  
in the most convenient position.  
Bring down the lever to lock the shoulder pad in the  
selected position.  
To remove the shoulder strap  
g
Pull in the direction of the arrow  
while pressing here.  
32  
Using the Shoulder Strap  
       
Fitting to a Tripod  
Using a Video Light  
First fit the VCT-U14 Tripod Adaptor to the tripod, then  
mount the camcorder on the tripod adaptor.  
You can use the Anton Bauer Ultralight 2 or equivalent for  
this camcorder. Use a video light powered by 12 V with  
maximum power consumption of 50 W.  
• If you connect the video light to the LIGHT connector on  
the camcorder and set the LIGHT switch to AUTO, you  
can turn the light on and off automatically as you start  
and stop the VTR operation.  
• The output of the video light connector on the camcorder  
is controlled to 12 V even when the camcorder is  
supplied with 12 V or more power (through the DC IN  
connector or battery pack). The brightness or color  
temperature of the light will not change according to  
voltage increase.  
VCT-U14 Tripod  
Adaptor  
Tripod  
Notes  
• Do not use a video light with power consumption of over  
50 W.  
Slide the camcorder forward along the slot, until it  
clicks firmly into place.  
• The brightness or color temperature of the light will  
change when the supplied voltage (through the DC IN  
connector or battery pack) is under 12 V.  
To remove a tripod  
To attach the video light  
Fit the video light to the camcorder grip or the accessory  
shoe and connect the video light cable to the LIGHT  
connector.  
Hold down the red button and pull the  
lever in the direction of the arrow.  
Note  
After removing the camcorder, if the tripod adaptor pin has  
not returned to its original position, hold down the red  
button and move the lever in the direction of the arrow to  
return the pin to its original position. It is not possible to  
mount a camcorder with the pin left out.  
Pin  
33  
Fitting to a Tripod  
         
To use the microphone detached from the  
camcorder  
You can use the supplied microphone detached from the  
camcorder.  
Preparing Audio Input  
System  
Using the supplied microphone  
1
Loosen the screw and open the microphone holder  
clamp.  
Clamp of the microphone holder  
Connect to the MIC IN  
connector.  
Set the AUDIO IN (CH-1/CH-2)  
switch for the desired audio  
recording channel to FRONT.  
Note  
When using the supplied microphone with an extension  
cable, always use an external power supply type cable.  
2
3
Place the microphone in the microphone holder.  
Using an external microphone  
Tighten the screw.  
You can connect up to two external monaural microphones  
to the AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 connectors, using a CAC-12  
Microphone Holder (not supplied).  
The procedure below is an example showing attachment of  
an ECM-670/672/etc. Electret Condenser Microphone.  
Close the microphone holder.  
Place the microphone in the  
holder so that “UP” is at the top.  
1
Remove the fixing screws for external microphone  
holder.  
Plug the microphone cable into the MIC IN connector,  
then set the AUDIO IN (CH-1/CH-2) switch for the  
desired recording channel to FRONT.  
2
3
Attach the CAC-12 Microphone Holder.  
Screws removed in step 1  
Connect to the MIC IN connector.  
CAC-12  
Open the CAC-12 and remove the microphone  
adaptor.  
34  
Preparing Audio Input System  
           
Use the microphone adaptor when using a small-  
diameter external microphone. When attaching an  
ECM-670, use the microphone adaptor supplied with  
these microphone.  
6
Set the switches as follows.  
• Set the AUDIO IN input selection switch as  
indicated below, depending on the type of  
microphone used.  
- When using a microphone with an internal power  
supply, set it to MIC (center).  
Open the CAC-12.  
- When using a microphone with an external power  
supply, set it to MIC +48V ON (right).  
• Set the AUDIO IN (CH-1/CH-2) switch of the  
channel that the microphone is connected to REAR.  
Microphone adaptor  
Loosen the screw.  
4
Place an external microphone (ECM-670/672/etc.  
Electret Condenser Microphone or similar  
microphone) in the CAC-12.  
Monaural microphone  
Close the CAC-12.  
AUDIO IN (CH-1/CH-2)  
switches  
to AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2  
connector  
Notes  
• The camcorder can use a microphone with an input level  
of – 60 dB. Other microphones may not be suitable for  
use with this camcorder due to differences in the input  
level.  
Tighten the screw.  
ECM-670/672 or  
similar microphone  
m
• In order for the AUDIO IN CH-1 and CH-2 connectors  
on the camcorder to be able to provide a phantom 48 V  
power supply, female XLR connectors (3-pin) are fitted.  
If the microphone cable has a female connector, use an  
adaptor.  
• When you detach a CAC-12 Microphone Holder once  
you have attached to the camcorder, be careful not to  
lose the two screws fixing the CAC-12. After detaching  
the CAC-12, be sure to put the two screws back into their  
original places.  
5
Connect the microphone cable to the AUDIO IN CH-  
1 or CH-2 connector.  
Using a wireless microphone  
system  
You can use the wireless microphone system including  
following models to record sound.  
• UHF Wireless Microphone  
NTSC system: WRT-807B, WRT-847B  
PAL system: WRT-807A/B, WRT-847A/B  
• UHF Synthesized Transmitter  
NTSC system: WRT-8B, WRT-822B  
PAL system: WRT-8B, WRT-822A/B  
• UHF Synthesizer Tuner  
NTSC system: WRR-855B, WRR-861B, WRR-862B  
PAL system: WRR-855A/B, WRR-861A/B (in  
Australia and Asia only), WRR-862A/B  
35  
Preparing Audio Input System  
   
For details on using the wireless microphone system, see  
the operating instructions for the microphone and tuner.  
To attach a WRR-861/862 (When using a  
BP-GL65/GL95/L60S Battery Pack)  
1
Attach a WRR tuner fitting (not supplied, service part  
number A-8278-057-A) to the back of the camcorder.  
To attach a WRR-855  
1
Open the cover of the WRR connector.  
1 Use a Phillips type screwdriver to tighten the four  
screws placed in the tuner fitting as illustrated  
below.  
WRR connector  
2 Loosen the adjustment screws of the tuner fitting.  
3 Adjust the tuner fitting position for a BP-GL65/  
GL95/L60S Battery Pack to be attached, and  
tighten the adjustment screws to fix its position.  
4 Attach the mount plate supplied with the WRR-  
2
3
Turn on a WRR-855, and set the MUTING to ON or  
OFF.  
861/862.  
The power of a WRR-855 can be synchronized with  
the POWER switch of the camcorder.  
BP-GL65/GL95/L60S  
Insert the WRR-855 into the CA-WR855.  
Mount plate (supplied  
with WRR-861/862)  
Adjustment  
screws  
Fasten the screws (supplied with  
the WRR-855).  
Back of the  
camcorder  
Phillips type screwdriver  
2
3
Attach the battery pack.  
4
Fit the attachment plate on the rear side of the CA-  
WR855 to the V-groove on the battery attachment  
interface, and then slide the CA-WR855 down until it  
connects to the WRR connector.  
For details about attaching the battery pack, see  
Mount the tuner on the WRR tuner fitting.  
WRR-861/862  
CA-WR855  
5
Set one of the AUDIO IN (CH-1/CH-2) switches to  
WRR (wireless).  
For details about the WRR tuner fitting (part number  
A-8278-057-A), contact your Sony service  
representatives.  
36  
Preparing Audio Input System  
     
4
5
Connect the tuner power cord to the DC OUT  
connector of the camcorder, and the audio output cable  
to the AUDIO IN CH-1 or CH-2 connector.  
Connecting the Remote  
Control Unit  
(DSR-450WS/450WSP  
only)  
Set the switches as below.  
• Set the AUDIO IN input selection switch to MIC for  
the channel to which the audio out cable is  
connected.  
• Set the AUDIO IN (CH-1/CH-2) switch for the  
channel to which the audio output cable is connected  
to REAR.  
Connecting the RM-B150/B750 Remote Control Unit  
enables remote control of the principal camera and VTR  
functions.  
Connecting the remote control unit to the REMOTE  
connector (8-pin) automatically puts the camcorder into  
remote control mode. If you disconnect the remote control  
unit, the remote control mode is cancelled.  
Connecting line input audio  
equipment  
RM-B150/B750  
1
Connect an audio mixer or other external audio system  
component to the AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 connector as  
shown below.  
AUDIO IN (CH-1/CH-2) switches:  
Set to REAR.  
AUDIO IN  
FRONT  
WRR  
REAR  
Remote  
connector  
AUDIO IN input selection switch:  
Set to LINE.  
Remote control cable  
+48V ON  
LINE  
MIC  
Camcorder switch functions when the  
remote control unit is connected  
The following switches on the camcorder do not function.  
• GAIN switch  
To audio mixer, etc.  
AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2  
connectors  
• OUTPUT/DCC switch  
• WHITE BAL switch  
• AUTO W/B BAL switch  
• SHUTTER switch  
2
Set the AUDIO IN input selection switch to LINE for  
the channel to which the external audio equipment is  
connected.  
Selection of the recording audio input  
Set the AUDIO IN (CH-1/CH-2) switch to REAR for the  
channel to which the external audio equipment is  
connected.  
If you record and adjust both channel 1 and 2, set both  
AUDIO IN (CH-1/CH-2) switches to REAR.  
• REC button (the VTR button on the lens and the  
ASSIGN switch to which the REC SWITCH function is  
assigned) when the RM REC START item is set to RM  
on the FUNCTION 3 page of the MAINTENANCE  
menu.  
For details of the function of the REC button, see  
Paint adjustment when the remote control  
unit is connected  
The settings of the paint adjustment that were in effect the  
last time the remote control unit was used are recalled.  
37  
Connecting the Remote Control Unit (DSR-450WS/450WSP only)  
               
Function of the REC button when the  
remote control unit is connected  
You can select the function of the REC button on the  
camcorder when the remote control unit is connected,  
using the RM REC START item on the FUNCTION 3  
page of the MAINTENANCE menu.  
Structure of the paint adjustment data  
The non-volatile memory of the camcorder used for  
storing paint adjustment data consists of two regions as  
shown below: one is the “independent data region” that is  
used when a remote control unit is not connected, and the  
other is the “remote control data region” that is used when  
a remote control unit is connected. Paint adjustment data is  
automatically selected and output to the camcorder  
depending on whether or not a remote control unit, such as  
an RM-B150, is connected.  
To disable the camcorder REC button and the  
lens VTR button  
On the FUNCTION 3 page of the MAINTENANCE  
menu, set RM REC START to RM.  
If the REC SWITCH function is assigned to the ASSIGN  
switch, this setting also disables these controls.  
Non-volatile memory  
Independent data  
region  
To enable the camcorder REC button and the lens  
VTR button  
On the FUNCTION 3 page of the MAINTENANCE  
menu, set RM REC START to CAM.  
If the REC SWITCH function is assigned to the ASSIGN  
switch, this setting also enables these controls. In this case,  
the VTR button on the remote control unit is disabled.  
MASTER BLACK  
MASTER GAMMA  
KNEE POINT  
DETAIL LEVEL  
R/B GAIN  
Setup  
menuofthe  
camcorder  
Hardware  
of the  
camera  
R/B BLACK  
Remote control  
data region  
To enable all of the camcorder REC button, the  
lens VTR button, and the remote control unit VTR  
button  
On the FUNCTION 3 page of the MAINTENANCE  
menu, set RM REC START to PARA.  
RM-B150  
MASTER BLACK  
MASTER GAMMA  
KNEE POINT  
DETAIL LEVEL  
R/B GAIN  
RM-B150 connected  
RM-B150 not  
connected  
If the REC SWITCH function is assigned to the ASSIGN  
switch, this setting also enables these controls.  
R/B BLACK  
When the monitor is connected to the  
remote control unit  
The MONITOR connector (BNC type) of the RM-B150/  
B750 outputs the same signal as that from the MONITOR  
OUT connector on the camcorder.  
Use the black cable supplied with the RM-B150/B750 to  
connect the monitor to the MONITOR connector on the  
RM-B150/B750.  
Thus, when a remote control unit is connected to the  
camcorder, the effective data region is switched to the  
“remote control data region” and the settings of the paint  
adjustment that were in effect last time the remote control  
unit was used are recalled.  
1)  
Settings of the absolute value volume and absolute value  
2)  
switches are overwritten by those on the remote control  
unit after the remote control unit is connected.  
When the remote control unit is removed from the  
camcorder, the “independent data region” becomes  
effective. Thus the camcorder will return to the settings  
that were in effect before the remote control unit was  
connected.  
When the remote control unit is  
disconnected from the camcorder  
The camcorder settings return to the settings in effect  
before the remote control unit was connected.  
By making a menu setting, the setting of the paint  
adjustment made with the remote control unit can be  
retained even after the remote control unit is removed from  
the camcorder.  
1) Absolute value volume: The data corresponding to the rotation degree  
(position) of the volume knob is output. The data corresponding to the  
rotation amount (change) is called the relative value volume.  
2) Absolute value switch: Toggle switches or slide switches (except the  
temporary switches) (or controls) whose positions must coincide with their  
functions are called absolute value switches.  
38  
Connecting the Remote Control Unit (DSR-450WS/450WSP only)  
 
To use settings of the paint adjustment data  
stored in the “independent data region” even  
when a remote control unit is connected  
Set RM COMMON MEMORY to ON on the FUNCTION  
3 page of the MAINTENANCE menu.  
In this case, the settings stored in the “independent data  
region” will be renewed according to the change made by  
remote control unit. Thus, the settings of the paint data  
made with the remote control unit can be retained even if  
the remote control unit is removed. However, if the switch  
position on the remote control unit differs from the one on  
the camcorder, the switch position on the camcorder takes  
precedence over that on the remote control unit.  
For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu  
To avoid changing video adjustment data when a  
remote control unit is connected  
Set RM COMMON MEMORY to ON on the FUNCTION  
3 page of the MAINTENANCE menu, and set all the  
volume on the remote control unit to the relative value  
mode.  
For details, refer to the operation manual supplied with  
the remote control unit.  
39  
Connecting the Remote Control Unit (DSR-450WS/450WSP only)  
   
Connections  
Chapter  
The items displayed on a monitor are same as the ones on  
the viewfinder. For details, see “Status display on the  
Connecting a Monitor  
As illustrated below, you can connect a color video  
monitor to the MONITOR OUT or VIDEO OUT  
connector of the camcorder.  
DSR-400/400P/450WS/450WSP  
Color video monitor  
VIDEO IN connector 1)  
MONITOR OUT connector  
or SDI IN connector  
(DSR-450WS/450WSP  
only) 2)  
or VIDEO OUT connector  
(DSR-450WS/450WSP  
only)  
1) When VBS is selected as the output signal of the VIDEO OUT connector  
2) When SDI is selected as the output signal of the VIDEO OUT connector  
(only when a CBK-SD01 is installed)  
When a CBK-SD01 SDI Output Board is installed  
(DSR-450WS/450WSP only)  
If a color video monitor provided with an SDI input  
connector is used, select SDI as the output signal of the  
VIDEO OUT connector and connect the camcorder to the  
SDI IN connector of the color video monitor.  
The camera display image is output to the CBK-SD01 SDI  
Output Board even when playing a recorded image.  
Notes  
• Playing the tape on the camcorder mutes the audio signal  
portion of the SDI output.  
• You can select either VBS or SDI for the output signal  
of the VIDEO OUT connector, depending on the input  
connector used on the monitor. See 1) and 2) in the  
illustration above.  
For details about settings, see “Selecting the output  
40  
Connecting a Monitor  
     
Note  
Using an i.LINK  
Connection  
When there is no equipment connected to the (i.LINK)  
DV OUT connector on the camcorder, the setting of the  
REC TRIGGER switch does not affect the internal VTR.  
Using the (i.LINK) DV OUT connector, you can  
connect external recording equipment to the camcorder. In  
this section, connections to equipment using DVCAM or  
DV format are explained.  
Making a backup of the images  
being recorded  
The audio and image being recorded can be backed up on  
an external VTR through i.LINK, at the same time it is  
being recorded on the camcorder.  
Note  
Depending on the equipment connected, you may be able  
to record in a format different from that of the camcorder.  
However, the recording function using different formats is  
limited.  
Example of connection  
DSR-400/400P/450WS/450WSP  
External VTR  
i.LINK cable  
(DV cable)  
Settings required for an i.LINK  
connection  
DSR-50/PD170, etc.  
When connecting via an i.LINK cable (DV cable), change  
the following settings depending on the connection.  
Note  
When the scan mode is 24P, video images, audio, or time  
code output via the i.LINK connection may not be  
continuous (DSR-450WS only).  
i.LINK CTL setting  
Selects whether or not to control recording (start and stop)  
on the external equipment connected to the (i.LINK) DV  
OUT connector from the camcorder. Select the setting  
from the following on the FUNCTION 3 page of the  
MAINTENANCE menu. The factory setting is REC/P.  
ALL: An external equipment is controlled from the  
camcorder while it records, pauses, or stops.  
REC/P (REC/PAUSE): An external equipment is  
controlled from the camcorder while it records or  
pauses.  
To record the same material using the  
internal VTR of the camcorder and on an  
external VTR simultaneously  
1
2
Set the REC TRIGGER switch to PARALLEL.  
Check the settings of an external VTR and set the  
i.LINK CTL to the same settings.  
OFF: No control from the camcorder.  
REC TRIGGER switch  
3
Press the REC button.  
Sets the function of the REC button on the camcorder or  
the VTR button on the lens when an external VTR is  
connected to the (i.LINK) DV OUT connector. Set to  
INT ONLY when you need to do cut editing or making a  
copy of a tape using the (i.LINK) DV OUT connector.  
PARALLEL: Operates both internal and external VTRs  
simultaneously.  
INT ONLY: Operates the internal VTR only. External  
VTR operation is performed locally.  
EXT ONLY: Operates the external VTR only. The  
TALLY indicator on the camcorder lights up when  
the external VTR is in recording mode.  
Recording starts on both the internal VTR of the  
camcorder and the external VTR.  
Note  
If recording on the camcorder and the external VTR starts  
at the same time, the recording starting points differ  
because of variation due to the external VTR connected.  
Also, it is recommended that you use internal mode as the  
time code generator mode for an external VTR. If you  
synchronize the time code generator of the camcorder  
using external mode, the time code may not be continuous.  
41  
Using an i.LINK Connection  
               
• In order to check the video image when a DSR-1500A/  
1800A/2000A or similar equipment is connected to the  
camcorder, it is necessary to set the input to a setting  
other than i.LINK. When the input is set to i.LINK,  
i.LINK is only used for input and no signal is output via  
the i.LINK connection. Therefore, a gray image is  
displayed on the camcorder.  
To record by clip using the internal VTR  
while simultaneously recording on an  
external VTR  
While recording material consecutively by time on an  
external VTR, the material needed for editing can be  
recorded clip by clip using the internal VTR of the  
camcorder.  
1
2
Set the REC TRIGGER switch to INT ONLY.  
Using the camcorder as a feeder  
Press the recording button of the external VTR.  
Recording starts on the external VTR.  
To copy digitally from the camcorder to the  
VTR without the editing function  
3
Press the REC button on the camcorder.  
Using an i.LINK cable (DV cable) to connect a digital  
video cassette recorder with an i.LINK connector to the  
camcorder, digital copy of video and audio can be carried  
out.  
Recording starts on the internal VTR. Pressing the  
REC button switches between recording and pausing  
using the internal VTR.  
Example of connection  
To check the playback image recorded on  
an external VTR  
DSR-400/400P/450WS/450WSP  
You can check the playback image recorded on an external  
VTR that is connected to the camcorder for backup.  
External VTR  
i.LINK cable  
(DV cable)  
1
2
3
Connect the camcorder to the external VTR using an  
i.LINK cable (DV cable).  
DSR-1800A/45, etc.  
Set the REC TRIGGER switch to PARALLEL or EXT  
ONLY.  
1
Make the settings below to prepare the external VTR.  
Press the STOP button on the camcorder to set the  
internal VTR of the camcorder to stop mode, or press  
the EJECT button to eject the cassette.  
• Set REC MODE to the same recording mode as that  
of the camcorder.  
• In NTSC color system, when the recording mode is  
set to DVCAM, select either DF or NDF.  
• Set AUDIO MODE to either 4-channel or 2-channel  
mode, according to the tape that is played on the  
camcorder.  
4
Start playback on the external VTR.  
The i.LINK on the camcorder changes to input mode,  
and the playback image from the external VTR is  
displayed on the viewfinder and the LCD monitor, and  
through the MONITOR OUT connector.  
2
3
4
Pause recording on the external VTR.  
Play the tape on the camcorder.  
Notes  
• The i.LINK on the camcorder changes to input mode  
only when the connected external equipment is played  
back. (When the REC TRIGGER switch is set to INT  
ONLY, the i.LINK does not change to input mode.)  
• The playback image from the external VTR cannot be  
recorded using the internal VTR of the camcorder.  
• Depending on the external equipment connected, the  
playback image may be overlapped or skipped over if the  
playback signal contains jitter. However, this is not a  
malfunction.  
Check the playback on the camcorder, and when  
playback reaches the scene that you want to record,  
start recording again on the external VTR.  
The copy to the external VTR starts.  
5
When copy to the external VTR is finished, release the  
recording pause on the external VTR, and then stop  
playback of the tape on the camcorder.  
For details on the external VTR, see the instruction manual  
supplied with the external VTR.  
42  
Using an i.LINK Connection  
     
To control the camcorder from the VTR  
using the editing function  
To control the camcorder from a non-linear  
editing system  
By connecting a VTR with an i.LINK connector to the  
(i.LINK) DV OUT connector of the camcorder using an  
i.LINK cable (DV cable), you can control playback and  
recording of the camcorder and perform cut editing and  
digital copy.  
Using the i.LINK cable (DV cable), you can transfer video  
and audio signals to a non-linear editing system from the  
camcorder. Editing software that supports the selected  
recording format (DVCAM or DV) must be used.  
Example of connection  
Example of connection  
DSR-400/400P/450WS/450WSP  
PC  
DSR-400/400P/450WS/450WSP  
i.LINK cable  
(DV cable)  
External VTR  
i.LINK cable  
(DV cable)  
Computer with editing  
software that supports  
DVCAM or DV format  
installed  
DSR-2000A, etc.  
1
2
Set the REC TRIGGER switch to INT ONLY.  
1
2
Set the REC TRIGGER switch to INT ONLY.  
Make the settings below to prepare the external VTR.  
Operate the PC to set up the non-linear editing  
software.  
When using DSR-2000A, press the i.LINK button on  
the remote control setting section.  
For details, see the software’s manual.  
Note  
Notes  
To use the automatic copying function of DSR-2000A,  
it is necessary to set the recording format of the  
camcorder to DVCAM on the VTR MODE page of the  
MAINTENANCE menu.  
• Video edited using a non-linear editing system cannot be  
recorded on tape using the camcorder via an i.LINK  
cable (DV cable).  
• A tape recorded with a non-continuous time code may  
not be able to be captured frame by frame using a non-  
linear editing system.  
For details on the external VTR, see the instruction  
manual supplied with the external VTR.  
43  
Using an i.LINK Connection  
 
Example 1: When camcorder 2 is synchronized with  
the signal of camcorder 1  
Other Connections  
DSR-450WS/450WSP  
Connecting a number of camcorders  
BNC cable  
to VIDEO OUT  
When using two or more synchronized camcorders,  
connect an external sync signal to the GENLOCK IN  
connector, supplying a VBS or BS signal. The camcorder  
will then operate synchronized to this signal.  
You can adjust the synchronization using the GENLOCK  
page of the MAINTENANCE menu.  
Camcorder 1  
to MONITOR OUT  
BNC cable  
Portable VTR  
When a CBK-SD01 SDI Output Board is installed in the  
DSR-450WS/450WSP, it is necessary to set REAR BNC  
OUT SEL to VBS on the OUTPUT page of the  
OPERATION menu.  
to video input  
connector  
to video input  
connector  
Notes  
• When a CBK-SC01 Composite Input Board (not  
supplied) is installed, set REC VIDEO SOURCE to  
CAM on the SOURCE SEL page of the OPERATION  
menu.  
• When connecting a number of camcorders and  
synchronizing their time codes, wait until the reference  
camcorder becomes stable (a state where a normal  
picture appears on the viewfinder or the LCD monitor),  
and then connect the other camcorders.  
BNC cable  
DSR-400/400P/450WS/450WSP  
to MONITOR OUT/  
VIDEO OUT  
to GENLOCK IN  
Camcorder 2  
Example 2: When camcorder 1 and 2 are synchronized  
with the signal of a DME switching device, etc.  
DME switching device, etc.  
to video  
input  
connector  
tosynchronized  
signal output  
connector *  
tosynchronized  
signal output  
connector *  
to video  
input  
connector  
BNC cable  
BNC cable  
BNC cable  
BNC cable  
to  
toGENLOCK  
to GENLOCK  
IN  
MONITOR/  
VIDEO OUT  
IN  
to MONITOR/  
VIDEO OUT  
DSR-400/400P/450WS/450WSP DSR-400/400P/450WS/450WSP  
Camcorder 1  
Camcorder 2  
* Either the BB (Black Burst) signal or the Color Bar signal, etc. can be used  
as a synchronized signal.  
44  
Other Connections  
     
Recording and Playback  
Chapter  
To insert a mini-size cassette  
Insert the cassette with the cassette window (on the  
front) facing outward. Push the cassette between the  
both guides.  
Inserting a Cassette  
The camcorder can use standard-size and mini-size  
DVCAM/DV cassettes. For details about usable cassette,  
1
2
Set the POWER switch to ON.  
Guides  
Mini-size cassette  
match marks  
While sliding the OPEN lever in the direction of the  
arrow, open the cassette lid.  
4
Close the cassette lid until it clicks.  
Top of the lid  
Press the lid firmly  
until it clicks.  
If the cassette lid  
is hard to close,  
press the top of  
the lid.  
OPEN lever  
3
Insert the cassette with the cassette window (on the  
front) facing outward and the REC/SAVE switch  
facing upward.  
To eject a cassette  
Follow the procedure above, and take out the cassette by  
Check for tape slack before inserting the cassette.  
pressing the EJECT button in step 3.  
Notes  
• Before inserting a cassette, make sure that there is no  
cassette in the cassette compartment. Inserting two  
cassettes by mistake may cause a malfunction.  
Press the center  
of the cassette.  
• Internal parts of the camcorder may become bent or  
otherwise damaged if you attempt to insert a mini-size  
cassette in the wrong direction (such as with the cassette  
turned backside front so the reel holes face the cassette  
holder window or with the cassette turned sideways so  
that a short side enters first).  
REC/SAVE switch  
• If a cassette is not inserted completely or gets stuck when  
being inserting, take out the cassette and reinsert it. If  
your insert a cassette forcibly, the cassette may not be  
45  
Inserting a Cassette  
           
inserted in the correct position or may cause a  
malfunction.  
• When inserting a cassette, hold the center of the cassette  
and insert it straight toward the compartment. Holding  
the side of the cassette may cause it to be inserted  
incorrectly.  
Basic Procedure for  
Shooting  
• When inserting a cassette, put the camcorder on a  
horizontal and stable surface.  
2
8
11  
12,13 1  
1
2
Set the POWER switch to ON.  
Set the FILTER selector and the 5600K button  
appropriately for the lighting conditions.  
FILTER selector  
setting  
Examples of shooting  
conditions  
1 (CLEAR)  
Studio halogen lighting  
(incandescent)  
2 (1/4 ND)  
Cloudy or rainy outdoor shooting,  
or to reduce the depth of field*  
3 (1/16 ND)  
4 (1/64 ND)  
Sunlight  
To reduce the depth of field in  
sunlight  
* The range over which the subject is sharply in focus. Thus, “reducing  
the depth of field” means that the range is reduced as well, and  
“increasing the depth of field” means that it is increasing as well.  
3
4
5
Check the switch settings on the camcorder.  
Check the settings in the menu.  
Check the lens settings and flange focal length  
adjustment (page 28).  
6
7
Adjust the eyepiece focus, and the contrast and  
brightness of the viewfinder image (page 30).  
Check the sound system settings.  
• Microphone connections (page 34)  
• Settings on the VTR section (page 14)  
46  
Basic Procedure for Shooting  
   
8
9
If required, switch on the center marker and/or safety  
zone in the viewfinder image.  
Recording  
100.  
Usable cassettes  
Also, press the ZEBRA button to display zebra pattern  
in the viewfinder.  
It is recommended to use the DVCAM cassettes listed  
below for this camcorder.  
If necessary, adjust the white balance and black  
balance (page 50).  
Model name  
Size  
PDV-184*/124*/94*/64*/34*  
PDVM-40*/32*/22*/12*  
Standard size  
Mini size  
10If necessary, adjust the iris and gain.  
For details about the adjustment of iris, see “Iris ring”  
55.  
The “*” in each model name is actually “ME” (indicating  
that a cassette memory is contained), or “N” (indicating  
that no cassette memory is contained).  
The numbers in the model names show maximum  
recording/playback time (minutes) for each model. For  
example, the maximum recording/playback time of the  
PDV-184* is 184 minutes.  
For details about the adjustment of gain, see “GAIN  
11Turn the focusing ring so that the subject is sharply in  
Note  
focus.  
If you insert an incorrect type of cassette, it will be  
automatically ejected.  
12Setup the VTR section according to your shooting  
objects, then start recording by pressing the REC  
button.  
DVCAM cassettes  
• During recording, the REC/TALLY indicator(s) in  
the viewfinder light(s), and “REC” appears on the  
viewfinder screen.  
• You can use the AUDIO LEVEL knob on the front  
of the camcorder to manually adjust the channel 1  
audio level. To do this, you must first set up the VTR  
section to enable manual adjustment of the audio  
recording level (page 57).  
The following figure illustrates the DVCAM cassettes’  
appearance.  
Standard size  
Mini size  
REC/SAVE  
switch  
13To pause recording, press the REC button again.  
Cassette memory  
Notes on using cassettes  
• Before storing the cassette, rewind the tape to the  
beginning and be sure to put the cassette in its storage  
case, preferably on end instead of flat on its side. The  
storage case of a DVCAM cassette is specially designed  
to ensure a long-period storage of the tape. Storing a  
cassette in any other condition (not rewound, out of its  
case, etc.) may cause the video and audio contents to  
become damaged over time.  
• If the cassette memory connector (contact point)  
becomes dirty, connection problems may occur and  
cause a loss of functions. Remove away any dust or dirt  
from this area before using the cassette.  
• If the cassette is dropped on the floor or otherwise  
receives a hard impact, the tape may become slackened  
47  
Recording  
       
and may not record and or play back correctly. For  
instructions on removing tape slack, see next page.  
• Follow the instructions in “Inserting a Cassette” on  
page 45 to insert a cassette, or the camcorder may be  
damaged.  
Differences between DVCAM and DV formats  
Item  
DVCAM  
DV  
Track pitch  
15 µm  
10 µm  
Audio sampling  
frequency  
12 bit: 32 kHz  
16 bit: 48 kHz  
12 bit: 32 kHz  
16 bit: 32 kHz,  
44.1 kHz, 48 kHz  
To prevent accidental erasure  
Set the REC/SAVE switch to SAVE to prevent accidental  
erasure of recorded contents.  
Audio recording  
Lock mode  
Unlock mode  
mode*  
Time code  
Drop frame system Drop frame  
or  
system (or Non-  
REC/SAVE switch  
Set to SAVE.  
Non-drop frame  
system (SMPTE  
time code)  
drop frame system  
when recording in  
DV format)  
* There are two modes for audio recording, lock mode and unlock mode. In  
lock mode, the sampling frequencies of audio and video are synchronized.  
In unlock mode, which consumer DV format adopts, the two sampling  
frequencies are independent. Therefore, lock mode is more effective than  
unlock mode in digital processing and smooth transition during audio  
editing.  
REC  
SAVE  
If you insert a cassette into the camcorder when the REC/  
SAVE switch is set to SAVE, the camcorder will not  
record when you press the REC button.  
Note  
Audio with sampling frequency 16 bit: 32 kHz and 44.1  
kHz cannot be recorded on this camcorder.  
To enable recording  
Set the REC/SAVE switch back to REC.  
Compatibility on cassettes  
The recording format of picture is defined according to  
recorder’s format as described below.  
To check the tape for slack  
Turn the reel gently with a paper clip, etc., in the direction  
shown by the arrow. If the reel does not move, there is no  
slack. Insert the cassette into the cassette holder, and after  
about 15 seconds take it out.  
Recorder’s  
format  
Cassette that is  
used  
Recording  
format  
DVCAM  
DVCAM tape  
DV tape  
DVCAM  
DV  
DVCAM tape  
DV tape  
DV  
Paper clip, etc.  
• Though DV cassettes can be used for recording in  
DVCAM format, we recommend you to use DVCAM  
cassettes to get the most out of high reliability of  
DVCAM format.  
Reel  
• When you record using DV cassettes in DVCAM  
format, the recording time of DV cassettes is 2/3 shorter  
than that indicated on the DV cassettes.  
Compatibility of DVCAM and DV formats  
This camcorder can also use the consumer DV format in  
addition to the DVCAM format (only SP mode is available  
for DV format, you cannot record/play in LP mode of the  
DV format). Here explained are the differences,  
compatibility, and limitations on editing about DVCAM  
and DV formats.  
Compatibility on playback  
Some tapes cannot be played back on DVCAM or DV  
video equipment.  
Tape  
On DV video  
equipment  
On DVCAM video  
equipment  
DV-formatted  
Can be played  
back.  
Can be played  
back only when  
recorded in SP  
mode.  
DVCAM-  
formatted  
Some equipment  
may be able to play back.  
back.  
Can be played  
48  
Recording  
     
Compatibility on editing using DV connectors  
When this digital camcorder is connected to other  
DVCAM or DV video equipment using DV cable (i.LINK  
cable), the recording format of edited tapes is defined  
according to recorder’s format as described below. Read  
through “Limitations on editing” before editing, because  
you may find the limitations when you use the tapes edited  
in some conditions.  
Selecting the recording format  
Before recording, it is necessary to select the recording  
format from either DVCAM or DV SP format.  
Notes  
• If recording formats are mixed in one tape, the part  
where the video images recorded in different formats  
will be distorted.  
Source tape  
Player’s  
format  
Recorder’s Recording  
format  
format  
• When shooting in DV SP format, the video recorded in  
back space editing (recording several scenes  
continuously) may not be smooth. To shoot reliable  
video, it is recommended that you use a DVCAM  
cassette and set REC FORMAT to DVCAM (see the  
following procedure).  
1)  
1)  
DV  
DVCAM  
DVCAM  
DV  
DVCAM  
DV  
(only in SP mode)  
DV  
DV  
DVCAM  
DV  
DVCAM  
DV  
2)  
DVCAM  
DVCAM  
DV  
DVCAM  
DVCAM  
4)  
DV  
1
Display the VTR MODE page of the  
MAINTENANCE menu.  
2)  
3)  
5)  
DVCAM  
DV  
DVCAM  
DV  
DVCAM  
DV  
4)  
For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu  
1) When using the DVCAM video equipment to carry out DV dubbing of a  
tape recorded in DV format, the tape produced will be in DVCAM format  
as follows:  
-
Audio recording mode will be unlock mode.  
?M05 VTR MODE  
TOP  
(A tape in lock mode may be copied on some video equipment. For  
details, see the instruction manual supplied with your video equipment.)  
The time code format will be partly maladjusted. (There will be no  
effect on the recorded picture except in certain case.)  
REC TALLY BLINK :  
ON  
1MIN  
DVCAM  
ON  
STBY OFF TIMER  
REC FORMAT  
SETUP ADD  
:
:
:
-
2) If the tape that is to be dubbed is DVCAM formatted tape as explained in  
1), the tape produced will be in DVCAM format as follows:  
-
-
Audio recording mode will be unlock mode.  
The time code format will be partly maladjusted.  
3) Some DV video equipment may be able to play back a DVCAM-formatted  
tape. However, even if the tape is played back, contents of the playback  
cannot be guaranteed. Therefore, if an appropriate DVCAM-formatted  
tape is used for playback, the tape produced will be in DVCAM format and  
will have a partly maladjusted time code format.  
4) The audio recording mode of the edited tape is lock mode. If the tape that  
is to be dubbed is a DVCAM formatted tape as explained in 1), the audio  
recording mode of the edited tape is unlock mode.  
2
3
Press the MENU knob. Then turn the MENU knob to  
move b to REC FORMAT, and press the MENU knob  
again.  
b changes to z, and z changes to ?.  
5) Depending on model of video equipment, you may not be able to edit.  
Turn the MENU knob to display the desired recording  
format (DVCAM or DV SP), then press the MENU  
knob.  
Note  
When you use a tape as explained in 1) to 3) above, you  
may find limitations regardless of the format of the player  
and recorder.  
z changes to b, ? changes to z, and the selection is  
set.  
Limitations on editing  
When using a tape copied or edited using DV connectors,  
you will find the following limitations when editing,  
because of the difference in DVCAM and DV formats.  
• Due to the difference of a track pitch, you cannot edit on  
DV-formatted tapes using DVCAM video equipment.  
• You cannot edit DVCAM-formatted tapes recorded in  
unlock mode using some DVCAM video equipment. In  
this case, copy the tape again using the audio/video  
jacks.  
49  
Recording  
     
2
Push the AUTO W/B BAL switch to BLACK and  
release the switch.  
Adjusting the black balance/white  
balance  
The switch returns to the center position, and the  
adjustment is executed.  
During adjustment, the following message is displayed  
on the viewfinder screen.  
To ensure excellent image quality when using this  
camcorder, conditions may require that both the black  
balance and the white balance be adjusted.  
If the black balance or white balance adjustment is started,  
messages that report on the progress and results are  
displayed on the viewfinder screen when the VF DISP  
MODE item is set to 2 or 3 on the VF DISP 1 page of the  
OPERATION menu.  
The messages change in  
sequence:  
-BLACK SET-  
r
-BLACK BALANCE-  
ABB:EXECUTING  
-BLACK SET-  
Note  
The black balance adjustment ends in a few seconds  
with the message “ABB: OK” and the adjustment  
value is automatically stored in memory.  
Black balance and white balance adjustment values that  
are automatically set by the camcorder and the various  
settings are stored in the camcorder memory and retained  
even when the power is turned off.  
Notes  
To adjust the black balance  
The black balance will require adjustment in the following  
cases.  
• When the camcorder is used for the first time  
• When the camcorder has not been used for a long time  
• When the camcorder is used under conditions in which  
the surrounding temperature has changed greatly  
• When the GAIN switch (L/M/H) values have been  
changed by using the OPERATION menu  
It is not usually necessary to adjust the black balance when  
using the camcorder after it has been off.  
In automatic black balance mode, adjustments are  
performed in the following order: clamp level, black set,  
and black balance.  
Note that the automatic black balance adjustment  
includes a function to correct minor bright or dark  
points of light (red, blue, or green) that appear on the  
CCDs, in addition to the normal black balance  
operation.  
• During the black balance adjustment, the iris is  
automatically closed.  
• During the black balance adjustment, the gain selection  
circuit is automatically activated so you may see  
flickering on the viewfinder screen, but this is not a  
malfunction.  
If automatic black balance adjustment cannot be  
made  
If the black balance adjustment cannot be completed  
normally, an error message will appear for about 3 seconds  
on the viewfinder screen.  
Error message  
Meaning  
ABB: NG  
The lens iris did not close. Check if  
IRIS NOT CLOSED the lens cable is connected properly.  
ABB: NG  
TIME LIMIT  
Adjustment could not be completed  
within the standard number of  
attempts.  
ABB: NG  
R (or G or B):  
OVERFLOW  
The difference between the  
reference value and the current  
value is so great that it exceeds the  
range.  
If any of the above error messages is displayed, retry the  
black balance adjustment. Keep pushing the AUTO W/B  
BAL switch to BLACK until “-BLACK SET-” appears  
after “-BLACK BALANCE-” appears. If the error  
message occurs repeatedly, contact your Sony service  
representatives.  
2
1
1
Power the camcorder on, and set the OUTPUT/DCC  
switch to CAM.  
50  
Recording  
     
3
Place a white test card under the same lighting  
conditions as for the subject to be shot and zoom up to  
it.  
To adjust the white balance  
It is necessary to adjust the white balance each time the  
principal lighting source changes.  
Alternatively, any white object such as a cloth or a  
wall can be used.  
The absolute minimum white area is as follows.  
1
Set the switches and selectors as shown in the figure  
below.  
FILTER selector  
Rectangle centered on  
the screen. The lengths  
of the sides are 70% of  
the length and width of  
the screen.  
The white object must  
be within the rectangle  
and have an area of at  
least 10% of the screen.  
Note  
Make sure there are not bright spots in the rectangle.  
4
5
Adjust the lens iris.  
OUTPUT/DCC switch:  
CAM  
Manually adjusted lens: Set the iris to an appropriate  
setting.  
Lens with automatic iris: Set the automatic/manual  
switch on the lens to automatic.  
WHITE BAL switch: A or B*  
Push the AUTO W/B BAL switch to WHITE, and then  
release the switch.  
GAIN switch: Set as low as possible.  
* White balance setting values are stored in memory B only when the  
WHITE SWITCH <B> item is set to MEM on the FUNCTION 2 page  
of the OPERATION menu.  
2
Set the FILTER selector and the 5600K button to suit  
the lighting conditions.  
FILTER selector setting and CC filter selection are as  
follows.  
AUTO W/B BAL switch  
The switch returns to the center position, and the  
adjustment is executed.  
Filter setting  
Lighting conditions  
1 (CLEAR)  
Studio halogen lighting  
(incandescent)  
During adjustment, the message “AWB:  
EXECUTING” is displayed on the viewfinder screen  
(when the display mode is set to 2 or 3 (page 99)).  
2 (1/4 ND)  
Cloudy or rainy outdoor shooting, or  
to reduce the depth of field  
3 (1/16 ND)  
4 (1/64 ND)  
Sunlight  
The white balance is adjusted in about one second, and  
the message “ABB: OK” appears. The adjustment  
setting is automatically stored in the memory (A or B)  
that was selected in step 1.  
To reduce the depth of field in  
sunlight  
If the setting of the FILTER selector is changed, a  
message reporting the setting appears for about 3  
seconds in the setting change and adjustment progress  
message display area of the viewfinder screen (when  
the display mode is set to 3 on page 99).  
AWB:OK  
. K  
Approximate color  
temperature of the  
subject  
51  
Recording  
 
the OPERATION menu, the WHITE SWITCH <B> item  
is set to ATW, the ATW function is activated to  
automatically adjust the white balance of the picture being  
shot for varying lighting conditions.  
Note  
If the camera has a zoom lens with an automatic iris,  
the iris may hunt. To prevent this, adjust the iris gain  
knob (indicated as IG, IS, or S) on the lens.  
*
If a memory error occurs  
For details, refer to the lens operation manual.  
If the error message “: STORED DATA: NG” flashes on  
the viewfinder screen when the camcorder is turned on, the  
white balance memory contents have been lost. Adjust the  
white balance again. Contact your Sony representative if  
this message continues to appear even after the white  
balance have been adjusted again.  
* Hunting: Repeated brightening and darkening of the image,  
resulting from repeated response to automatic iris control.  
If the automatic white balance adjustment cannot  
be made  
If the white balance adjustment cannot be completed  
normally, an error message will appear for about 3 seconds  
on the viewfinder screen (in display mode 2 or 3).  
Setting the electronic shutter  
Error message  
Meaning  
This section describes the shutter modes that can be used  
with the electronic shutter of the camcorder, and describes  
the procedure for selecting the shutter speed and shutter  
mode.  
WHITE: NG  
LOW LEVEL  
The white video level is too low. Either  
open the lens iris or increase the gain.  
WHITE: NG  
COLOR TEMP  
HIGH  
The color temperature is too high.  
Select a suitable setting for the 5600K  
button.  
About the shutter modes  
WHITE: NG  
COLOR TEMP  
LOW  
The color temperature is too low. Select  
a suitable setting for the 5600K button.  
The shutter modes that can be used with the electronic  
shutter and the shutter speeds that can be selected are listed  
below.  
WHITE: NG  
TIME LIMIT  
Adjustment could not be completed  
within the standard number of  
attempts. Try to adjust again. If fails a  
few times, contact your Sony dealer.  
Shutter  
mode  
Shutter speed  
Application  
WHITE: NG  
POOR WHITE  
AREA  
The white area could not be checked.  
Standard  
For shooting  
fast-moving  
subjects with  
little blurring.  
WHITE: NG  
OVER LEVEL  
The white video level is too high. Either  
stop down the lens iris or change the  
ND filter.  
1)  
1/40, 1/60, 1/120,  
1/125, 1/250,  
If any of the above error messages is displayed, retry the  
white balance adjustment. If the error message occurs  
repeatedly, contact your Sony service representatives.  
1/500, 1/1000,  
1/2000 (sec.)  
Scan Mode:24P  
1/32, 1/48, 1/96,  
1/125, 1/250,  
2)  
If you have no time to adjust the white balance  
Set the WHITE BAL switch to PRST.  
The white balance is automatically set as follows,  
depending on the 5600K button setting.  
• 5600K ON (lights on): 5600K  
1/500, 1/1000,  
1/2000 (sec.)  
DSR-  
400P/  
450WSP  
Scan Mode: I  
1/60, 1/125,  
1/250, 1/500,  
1/1000, 1/2000  
(sec.)  
• 5600K OFF (lights off): 3200K  
About the white balance memory  
Values stored in memory are held until the white balance  
is next adjusted.  
1)  
Scan Mode: PsF  
1/33, 1/50, 1/100,  
1/125, 1/250,  
1/500, 1/1000,  
1/2000 (sec.)  
There are two sets of white balance memories, A and B,  
and adjustments for each of the filters can be automatically  
stored in the memory corresponding to the setting (A or B)  
of the WHITE BAL switch. The camcorder has four built-  
in filters, so a total of eight (4 × 2) adjustments can be  
stored. The number of memories allocated to each of A and  
B can be limited to one by setting the WHT FILTER INH  
item to ON on the FUNCTION 3 page of the  
MAINTENANCE menu. In this case, the memory  
contents are not linked to the filter settings. If the WHITE  
BAL switch is set to B, and on the FUNCTION 2 page of  
52  
Recording  
         
To select the shutter mode and shutter  
speed  
Use the SHUTTER switch to select a shutter mode or a  
standard-mode shutter speed. To set the shutter speed in  
ECS or SLS mode, with the SHUTTER switch set to ON  
and the ECS or SLS mode selected, use the MENU knob  
for adjustment.  
Shutter  
mode  
Shutter speed  
Application  
ECS  
DSR-400/ Scan Mode: I  
For obtaining  
images with  
no horizontal  
bands of  
noise when  
shooting  
subjects such  
as monitor  
screens.  
(Extended 450WS  
Clear  
Scan)  
60.0 to 6000 Hz  
Scan Mode: PsF  
30.0 to 7000 Hz  
Scan Mode: 24P  
24.0 to 5000 Hz  
2)  
You can use the SHT ENABLE page of the OPERATION  
menu to narrow the range of choice in advance, or to select  
in advance whether or not you use ECS/SLS mode.  
DSR-  
400P/  
450WSP  
Scan Mode: I  
50.0 to 6000 Hz  
Scan Mode: PsF  
25.0 to 6000 Hz  
To set the shutter mode and standard mode  
shutter speed  
Once the shutter speed is selected, it is retained even when  
the camcorder is turned off.  
3)  
DSR-  
450WS  
1 to 8, 16 frames  
(1/30 to 1/4, 1/2  
sec.)  
For shooting  
subjects in  
low level  
lighting  
conditions.  
SLS  
(Slow  
Speed  
Shutter)  
DSR-  
450WSP  
1 to 8, 16 frames  
(1/25 to 1/3, 2/3  
sec.)  
1
Set VF DISP MODE to 2 or 3 on the VF DISP 1 page  
of the OPERATION menu.  
EVS  
Shutter speed currently  
Improved  
vertical  
(Enhanced selected in the Standard or  
Vertical  
definition  
System)  
For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu  
ECS mode  
resolution.  
However, the  
sensitivity  
and dynamic  
range are  
reduced.  
?05 VF DISP 1  
TOP  
VF DISP  
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
ON  
1
VF DISP MODE  
DISP EXTENDER  
DISP WHITE  
DISP GAIN  
DISP SHUTTER  
DISP AUDIO  
DISP TAPE  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
1) Only for the DSR-450WS/450WSP  
2) Only for the DSR-450WS  
3) The SLS mode can only be selected when the CCD scan mode (page 108)  
is set to I (interlace scan) (DSR-450WS/450WSP only).  
DISP IRIS  
Notes  
2
3
Flick the MENU switch to OFF.  
The menu disappears.  
• Whatever the operating mode of the electronic shutter,  
the sensitivity of the CCD decreases with increasing  
shutter speed.  
• When the automatic iris is used, the iris opens wider as  
the shutter speed increases, thus reducing the depth of  
field.  
Push the SHUTTER switch from ON to SELECT.  
• Under artificial light, particularly fluorescent or mercury  
lamps, the light intensity may appear to be constant, but  
the red, green, and blue intensities are actually changing  
in synchronization with the frequency of the power  
supply causing flicker. Using an electronic shutter under  
such lighting could make the flicker even worse. Color  
flicker is particularly likely to happen when the power  
supply frequency is 60 Hz. However, if the power  
frequency is 50 Hz, setting the shutter speed to 1/100 can  
reduce this flicker.  
• When a bright object is shot in EVS or ECS mode in  
such a manner that it fills the screen, the upper edge of  
the picture may have poor quality because of an inherent  
characteristic of CCDs. Before using EVS or ECS mode,  
check the shooting conditions.  
SHUTTER switch  
You can turn on or off the EVS mode on the SW STATUS  
page of the PAINT menu.  
The current shutter setting indication appears for about  
3 seconds in the setting change and adjustment  
progress message display area of the viewfinder  
screen.  
Examples: “: SS: 1/250”, “: SLS: 1/30: 1FRAME”,  
“: ECS: 60.0 Hz”  
53  
Recording  
           
4
Before the shutter setting indication in step 3  
disappears, push the SHUTTER switch down to  
SELECT again. Repeat this until the desired mode or  
speed appears.  
To set the shutter speed in SLS mode  
The settings of mode and speed preselected on the  
SHT ENABLE page of the OPERATION menu  
displayed. Note that all modes and all standard-mode  
speeds listed in the table on page 52 are preselected  
using the SHT ENABLE page of the OPERATION  
menu. By factory default, all available shutter modes  
and shutter speeds are displayed in the sequence  
shown in the following figure. (You can use the SHT  
ENABLE page of the OPERATION menu to make a  
setting so that only the desired (or most frequently  
used) modes and speeds are displayed.)  
2
1
1
speed mode to SLS.  
Example of standard mode (when the scan mode is set to I)  
SLS: 1/30 : 1FRAME  
SLS mode  
ECS mode  
To set the shutter speed in ECS mode  
2
Turn the MENU knob until the desired number of  
frames appears.  
The number of frames can be set to values in the range  
1 to 8, and 16 (1 frame nearly equals to 1/30 second).  
To change the range of shutter mode and speed  
settings  
You can reduce the time required to select the shutter mode  
and speed by narrowing the choice of settings in advance.  
This can be done by using the SHT ENABLE page of the  
OPERATION menu.  
2
1
1
2
speed mode to ECS.  
Note  
The settings selected on the SHT ENABLE page of the  
OPERATION menu become invalid when the RM-B150  
Remote Control Unit is connected to the camcorder.  
1
Display the SHT ENABLE page of the OPERATION  
menu.  
ECS:60.00Hz  
For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu  
Turn the MENU knob until the desired frequency  
appears.  
? 16 SHT ENABLE  
TOP  
The selectable frequency range varies depending on  
the scan mode. See the table on “About the shutter  
SHUTTER SLS  
SHUTTER ECS  
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
ON  
SHUTTER 1/100  
SHUTTER 1/125  
SHUTTER 1/250  
SHUTTER 1/500  
SHUTTER 1/1000  
SHUTTER 1/2000  
When the RM-B150 Remote Control Unit is  
connected  
You can set the shutter speed of ECS with the rotary  
encoder of the RM-B150.  
2
Press the MENU knob. Then turn the MENU knob to  
move b to the shutter mode or shutter speed you want,  
then press the MENU knob again.  
b changes to z, and z changes to ?.  
54  
Recording  
 
3
Turn the MENU knob until ON appears, then press the  
MENU knob.  
Adjusting the iris  
z changes to b, ? changes to z, and the selection is  
set.  
To set the automatic iris  
To set another mode or speed, return to step 2.  
The reference value for automatic iris adjustment can be  
changed to aid the shooting of clear pictures of back-lit  
subjects, or to prevent blown-out highlights. The reference  
value for the lens iris can be set within the following range  
with respect to the standard value.  
Note that only the mode and the shutter speeds set to  
ON can be selected with the SHUTTER switch.  
• 0.5: about 0.5 stop further open  
• 1: about 1 stop further open  
0.5: about 0.5 stop further closed  
1: about 1 stop further closed  
Also you can set the area where light detection occurs.  
To change the reference value  
1
Set IRIS OVERRIDE to ON on the AUTO IRIS page  
of the OPERATION menu.  
For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu  
? 11 AUTO IRIS  
TOP  
IRIS OVERRIDE  
IRIS SPEED  
CLIP HIGH LIGHT :  
:
:
ON  
ON  
ON  
IRIS WINDOW  
IRIS WINDOW IND :  
IRIS VAR WIDTH  
IRIS VAR HEIGHT :  
IRIS VAR H POS  
IRIS VAR V POS  
:
1
OFF  
1687  
6007  
0
:
:
:
0
2
3
Flick the MENU switch to OFF.  
The AUTO IRIS page disappears from the viewfinder  
screen.  
Turn the MENU knob to change the reference value as  
below.  
Note  
When setting the shutter speed while the shutter mode  
is set to ECS or SLS, the setting of shutter speed takes  
priority (page 53). To change the reference value,  
make sure the camcorder is not in a process of setting  
the shutter speed.  
To open the iris by 0.5 stop  
Turn the MENU knob counterclockwise as seen from  
the front of the camcorder. One bar (s) appears in the  
upper part to the left of the F number in the iris  
indication.  
To open the iris by 1 stop  
Turn the MENU knob further counterclockwise as  
seen from the front of the camcorder. Two bars (ss)  
55  
Recording  
       
appear in the upper part to the left of the F number in  
the iris indication.  
2
3
Turn the MENU knob to move b to IRIS WINDOW,  
and then press the MENU knob.  
To stop down the iris by 0.5 stop  
b changes to z and z changes to ?.  
Turn the MENU knob clockwise as seen from the front  
of the camcorder. One bar (s) appears in the lower  
part to the left of the F number in the iris indication.  
Turn the MENU knob to select the desired automatic  
iris window, and then press the MENU knob.  
To stop down the iris by 1 stop  
The shaded parts below indicate the area where light  
detection occurs.  
Turn the MENU knob further clockwise as seen from  
the front of the camcorder. Two bars (ss) appear in  
the lower part to the left of the F number in the iris  
indication.  
z changes to b, ? changes to z, and the selection is  
set.  
If you select VAR, the following items become  
effective and you can set the window of the desired  
size. Set each item to the desired size.  
Opening the lens iris  
Item  
Setting  
Iris opened by 1 stop  
(two bars)  
IRIS VAR WIDTH Width of the window  
IRIS VAR HEIGHT Height of the window  
IRIS VAR H POS  
IRIS VAR V POS  
Horizontal position of the window  
Vertical position of the window  
Iris opened by 0.5 stop  
(one bar)  
Stopping down the lens iris  
Iris stopped down by 1  
stop (two bars)  
To counter problems with very bright highlights  
If the subject is too bright, the iris may close too much,  
leaving the overall image dark, or the highlights may be  
blown out. In such cases, setting the highlight clip function  
on reduces the luminance range, avoiding problems from  
the automatic iris correction.  
Iris stopped down by 0.5  
stop (one bar)  
In the AUTO IRIS page of the USER menu, set the CLIP  
HIGH LIGHT item to ON.  
Not turning the MENU knob for a few seconds sets the  
reference value. The changed reference value is  
retained until the power of the camcorder is turned off.  
Even if the reference value is changed, it reverts to the  
standard value every time the power is turned on.  
To adjust the iris sensitivity  
When you use the VCL-917BY lens, you usually need not  
adjust the iris sensitivity because lenses are equipped with  
iris sensitivity adjustment function.  
In auto iris mode, if hunting or response delay happens,  
adjust the iris sensitivity using the iris sensitivity trimmer.  
When the RM-B150 Remote Control Unit is  
connected  
The IRIS control knob of the RM-B150 can be used for  
lens iris setting. In this case, the bar display (s) does not  
appear.  
Iris sensitivity trimmer (S or IRIS GAIN is indicated.)  
To select the automatic iris window  
1
Set IRIS WINDOW IND to ON on the AUTO IRIS  
page of the OPERATION menu.  
IRIS  
GAIN  
For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu  
The currently selected automatic iris window is  
displayed on the viewfinder.  
Set to OFF if the automatic iris window does not need  
to be always displayed.  
56  
Recording  
     
You can see the iris sensitivity trimmer when removing the  
gum cap on the front of the lens driving unit. Use a mini-  
screwdriver to turn the trimmer. If you turn it clockwise,  
the sensitivity increases, and if you turn it  
The input level value of the audio channel 1 is the  
value of the AUDIO LEVEL CH-1 control on the side  
multiplied by the value of the AUDIO LEVEL control  
on the front.  
counterclockwise, the sensitivity decreases.  
It is recommended that you confirm the iris sensitivity  
after replacing the lens.  
The input level value of the audio channel 2 is the  
value of the AUDIO LEVEL CH-2 control.  
When the top bar (0 dB) turns on, the audio level is too  
high. There is no problem if the second bar from the  
top turns on.  
For more information, refer to the operating instructions  
for the lens (or consult the lens maker).  
Adjusting the audio level  
All bars turn on.  
Setting the AUDIO SELECT (CH-1/CH-2) switches to  
AUTO automatically adjusts the input levels of the audio  
signal to be recorded in audio channels 1 and 2.  
These bars turn on.  
Normal input level Excessive input level  
To manually adjust the levels of the audio  
inputs from the AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2  
connectors  
Proceed as follows to adjust the levels of the audio inputs  
from the AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 connectors, which are to  
be recorded in audio channels 1 and 2.  
To adjust manually the level of audio channel 1  
without using the AUDIO LEVEL control on the  
front of the camcorder  
Set F AUDIO VOL to DISABLE on the AUDIO page of  
the MAINTENANCE menu.  
The setting of the AUDIO LEVEL control on the front of  
the camcorder is disabled.  
Setting the time data  
To set the time code  
The time code setting range is from 00:00:00:00 to  
23:59:59:29 (DSR-400/450WS) or 23:59:59:24 (DSR-  
400P/450WSP) (hours: minutes: seconds: frames).  
3
AUDIO LEVEL  
Note  
When the scan mode is 24P, see “Setting the CCD scan  
mode (DSR-450WS/450WSP only)” on page 107 (DSR-  
450WS only).  
AUTO  
MANUAL  
AUDIO SELECT  
3
2
1
Select the audio channel that you want to record in.  
2
3
Set the AUDIO SELECT (CH-1/CH-2) switch(es)  
corresponding to the audio channel(s) selected in step  
1 to MANUAL.  
5
PRESET  
REGEN  
CLOCK  
2
With the AUDIO LEVEL control on the side of the  
camcorder and the AUDIO LEVEL control on the  
front of the camcorder, adjust so that the audio level  
meter shows up to –20 dB for a normal input volume.  
F-RUN  
SET  
R-RUN  
4,6  
3
1
1
Press the DISP SEL button of the LCD monitor to  
display the STATUS screen.  
57  
Recording  
             
2
Press the DISPLAY button of the LCD monitor to  
display TC on the counter display section.  
3
4
Set the PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK switch to PRESET.  
Note  
When the scan mode is 24P, see “Setting the CCD scan  
mode (DSR-450WS/450WSP only)” on page 107 (DSR-  
450WS only).  
Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to SET.  
The first (left-most) digit of time code flashes.  
5
6
Use the arrow key to set the time code value including  
the last (right-most) digit of the time code.  
To set the user bits  
By setting the user bits (up to 8 hexadecimal digits), you  
can record user information such as the date, time, or scene  
number on the time code track.  
To reset the time code value to 00:00:00:00, press the  
RESET button of the LCD monitor.  
Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to the desired  
operating mode for the time code generator.  
F-RUN: Free run. The time code generator keeps  
running.  
R-RUN: Recording run. The time code generator runs  
only while recording.  
To set the DF (drop frame)/NDF (non-drop frame)  
mode  
You can select the drop frame (DF) mode or non-drop  
frame (NDF) mode on the FUNCTION 1 page of the  
OPERATION menu.  
4
PRESET  
REGEN  
CLOCK  
2
F-RUN  
SET  
R-RUN  
3,5  
1
Note  
1
2
3
Press the DISP SEL button of the LCD monitor to  
display the STATUS screen.  
When the scan mode is 24P, see “Setting the CCD scan  
mode (DSR-450WS/450WSP only)” on page 107 (DSR-  
450WS only).  
Press the DISPLAY button on the LCD monitor to  
display U-BIT in the counter display section.  
To make the time code consecutive  
When the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch is set to R-RUN,  
recording a number of scenes on the tape normally  
produces consecutive time code. However, once you  
remove the cassette and record on another cassette, the  
time code will no longer be contiguous even when you use  
again the original cassette for recording.  
Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to SET.  
The first (left-most) digit flashes.  
4
Use the arrow key to set the time code value including  
the last (right-most) digit of time code.  
In this case, to make the time code consecutive, proceed as  
follows.  
Hexadecimal digits A to F are displayed as A to F in  
capital letters.  
To reset the user bit data to 00 00 00 00, press the  
RESET button of the LCD monitor.  
1
2
Set the PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK switch to REGEN.  
Use the EDIT SEARCH +FWD/–REV button to select  
the point where the recording should be start again.  
5
Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to the desired  
operating mode for the time code generator.  
This reads the previous recording and synchronizes the  
internal time code generator, thus allowing the new  
time code to be recorded consecutively.  
F-RUN: Free run. The time code generator keeps  
running.  
R-RUN: Recording run. The time code generator runs  
only while recording.  
To save the actual time in the time code  
Setting the PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK switch to CLOCK  
saves the actual time in the time code. When it is necessary  
to set the actual time, use the TIME/DATE page of the  
DIAGNOSIS menu.  
To synchronize the time code  
You can synchronize the internal time code generator of  
this camcorder with an external generator for the  
regeneration of an external time code. You can also  
58  
Recording  
         
synchronize the time code generators of other camcorders/  
VTRs with the internal generator of this camcorder.  
To synchronize the time code  
Connections for time code synchronization  
Connect both the reference video signal and the external  
time code as illustrated below.  
Example 1: Synchronizing with an external time code  
PRESET  
REGEN  
CLOCK  
F-RUN  
SET  
R-RUN  
TC IN  
3
4
1 2  
External time code  
GENLOCK IN *  
Reference video signal  
* Set GENLOCK to ON on the GENLOCK page of the MAINTENANCE  
menu, if GENLOCK is set to OFF.  
Example 2: Interconnecting a number of camcorders  
and using one of them as the reference camcorder for  
time code synchronization  
Notes  
• In the following configuration, wait until the reference  
camcorder becomes stable (a state where a normal  
picture appears on the viewfinder or the LCD monitor),  
and then connect the other camcorders.  
• When the scan mode is 24P, see “Setting the CCD scan  
mode (DSR-450WS/450WSP only)” on page 107 (DSR-  
450WS only).  
1
2
3
Set the PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK switch to PRESET.  
Set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to F-RUN.  
Press the DISPLAY button of the LCD monitor to  
display TC on the counter display section.  
4
Supply a time code signal and a reference video signal  
complying with the SMPTE standard and in proper  
phase relationship, to the TC IN connector and to the  
GENLOCK IN connector, respectively.  
MONITOR OUT  
TC OUT  
This operation synchronizes the internal time code  
generator with the external time code. After about 10  
seconds, you can disconnect the external time code  
without losing the synchronization. However, there  
will be noise on the recorded image if you connect or  
disconnect the time code signal during recording.  
Reference camcorder  
TC IN  
GENLOCK IN *  
TC OUT  
MONITOR OUT  
Notes  
• When you finish the above procedure, the internal time  
code is immediately synchronized with the external time  
code and the counter display will show the value of the  
external time code. However, wait for a few seconds  
until the sync generator stabilizes before recording.  
• If the frequency of the reference video signal is not the  
same as the frame frequency of the camcorder, the  
camera cannot be correctly genlocked. In such a case, the  
internal time code is not correctly synchronized with the  
external time code.  
GENLOCK IN *  
TC IN  
TC OUT  
MONITOR OUT  
To another camcorder to be synchronized  
* Set GENLOCK to ON on the GENLOCK page of the MAINTENANCE  
menu, if GENLOCK is set to OFF.  
59  
Recording  
• When the internal time code generator is set to F-RUN  
mode, the precision of the synchronization may be  
reduced if you turn the POWER switch off and on or  
keep the camcorder turned off for a long time.  
• When the GENLOCK item is set to OFF on the  
GENLOCK page of the MAINTENANCE menu, the  
time code cannot be synchronized with the reference  
video signal. In this case, set the GENLOCK item to ON.  
Shooting  
Setting and effect  
conditions  
The 3200K  
preset white  
balance makes  
the picture  
reddish.  
Setting: Change the setting of the preset  
white balance on the PRESET WHT  
page of the MAINTENANCE menu.  
Effect: This prevents the picture from  
reddening.  
To correct skin detail  
You can specify a color other than a skin tone to adjust the  
color.  
About user bit settings during time code  
synchronization  
When the time code is synchronized, only the time data is  
synchronized with the external time code value. Therefore,  
the user bits can have their own settings for each  
camcorder.  
1
2
3
4
Set SKIN AREA IND to ON on the SKIN DETAIL  
page of the PAINT menu.  
For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu  
To release the time code synchronization  
First disconnect the external time code, then set the F-  
RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to R-RUN.  
Set SKIN DETECT on the SKIN DETAIL page of the  
PAINT menu.  
To change the power supply from the battery  
pack to an external power supply during time  
code synchronization  
To maintain a continuous power supply, connect the  
external power supply to the DC IN connector before  
removing the battery pack. You may lose time code  
synchronization if you remove the battery pack first.  
This causes the area detect cursor to be shown in the  
viewfinder.  
Place the area detect cursor on the target, then execute  
SKIN DETECT.  
This designates the correction area, which is indicated  
by a zebra pattern.  
Camera synchronization during time code  
synchronization  
During time code synchronization, the camera is  
genlocked to the reference video signal input from the  
GENLOCK IN connector.  
Change the value of SKIN DTL WIDTH (0 to 359) on  
the SKIN DETAIL page so that the zebra pattern may  
be displayed in the target area.  
Set the correction level beforehand on the SKIN  
DETAIL LVL item on the SKIN DETAIL page.  
Setting for special shooting cases  
Depending on the shooting conditions, set the camcorder  
appropriately referring below.  
5
When the setting is finished, set SKIN AREA IND to  
OFF on the SKIN DETAIL page.  
Shooting  
conditions  
Setting and effect  
The subject is  
completely still  
Setting: Set the EVS (Enhanced Vertical  
definition System) function to ON on the  
(Example: When SW STATUS page of the PAINT menu.  
shooting  
documents,  
drawings, etc.).  
Enabling the EVS function tends to  
increase the occurrence of aliasing  
problems (moiré patterns). Therefore,  
normally leave the function disabled.  
Effect: This enhances the vertical  
resolution.  
When adjusting Setting: See To correct skin detail” on  
for skin detail or page 60.  
tone (Example:  
When shooting  
to hide skin  
details)  
Effect: This adjusts the skin detail or  
tone to a designated active area.  
60  
Recording  
       
camcorder is in standby-off mode, it takes time for the  
recording to start after pressing the REC button.  
Back Space Editing  
You can set the time out value for automatic switching to  
standby-off mode from 1 minute, 3 minutes, or 5 minutes,  
on the VTR MODE page of the MAINTENANCE menu  
This section describes the steps for recording several  
scenes continuously.  
1
page 46 to begin recording.  
Starting back space editing at any  
tape position  
To continue the time code that has been recorded on  
the tape, set the F-RUN/SET/R-RUN switch to R-  
RUN.  
This section describes the steps for inserting a new scene  
at any desired position on the tape.  
The following steps can also be used to restart recording  
after an interruption has occurred.  
For details of time codes, see “Setting the time data”  
2
When you have finished recording a scene, press the  
REC button on the camcorder or the VTR button on  
the lens.  
1
2
Insert the cassette containing the previous recording.  
Perform steps 2 to 11 in “Basic Procedure for  
This pauses the recording operation.  
To continue from the last time code of the previous  
recording, set the PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK switch  
to REGEN.  
Note  
Do not do any of the following before the next scene  
is shot as it will interrupt the recording (the  
recording will not be continuous).  
• Remove the cassette.  
• Transport the tape (play, rewind, fast forward).  
• Replace the battery when the camcorder is powered.  
3
Press the PLAY button.  
The recorded contents are displayed on the viewfinder  
screen.  
3
4
When you are ready to shoot the next scene, again  
press the REC button on the camcorder or the VTR  
button on the lens.  
Operation at  
playback  
Procedure  
This restarts the recording operation.  
Fast forward the  
tape  
Press the F FWD button.  
Press the REW button.  
Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each scene to be shot.  
Rewind the tape  
To  
Procedure  
REW button  
PLAY button  
Restart an interrupted See next section “Starting back  
recording (see step 2 space editing at any tape  
F FWD button  
REW  
REV  
PLAY  
F FWD  
STOP  
above)  
EDIT  
FWD  
Check the recorded  
contents  
contents immediately after  
SEARCH  
STOP button  
Stop recording  
Press the REC button on the  
camcorder or the VTR button on  
the lens, then press the STOP  
button.  
If there is a long period before shooting  
the next scene  
Once put the camcorder into recording pause mode, it  
waits a certain (user-definable) period of time and then  
automatically switches to standby-off mode. When the  
61  
Back Space Editing  
     
4
5
6
Press the STOP button when the tape reaches the  
position where you want to start the new recording  
(see the figure in step 3).  
1
2
Insert the cassette containing the previous recording.  
Perform steps 2 to 11 in “Basic Procedure for  
This stops playback.  
3
Press and hold either of the +FWD or –REV button of  
the EDIT SEARCH +FWD/–REV buttons.  
Press the RET button on the lens.  
This rewinds the tape slightly and runs it until the  
continue point, then sets the camcorder to recording  
pause state.  
–REV button  
+FWD button  
REW  
PLAY  
F FWD  
STOP  
Press the REC button on the camcorder or the VTR  
button on the lens.  
REV  
EDIT  
SEARCH  
FWD  
This starts recording.  
To carry out back space editing frame by frame,  
specify the continue position using the edit search  
function. For details, see the next section “Using the  
Notes  
• When the scan mode is 24P, see “Setting the CCD scan  
mode (DSR-450WS/450WSP only)” on page 107 (DSR-  
450WS).  
The tape is moved in reverse or forward search mode  
for as long as you hold down the button, and the image  
is shown in the viewfinder.  
• If you set the POWER switch to off during recording or  
when recording is paused, the camcorder automatically  
goes through its shut-down sequence, then powers off.  
When you next set the POWER switch to on, the  
camcorder automatically finds the point at which  
recording ended, and sets itself up so that you can carry  
in with continuous recording. Note that this operation  
takes several seconds: do not set the POWER switch to  
off or replace the battery during this interval, as the  
automatic recording continuity will be lost.  
Note also that the recording continuity is lost in the  
following cases.  
Note  
Do not shut off the power while using the edit search  
function. The continue point may be lost.  
4
5
Release the +FWD or –REV button when you find the  
tape location where you want to continue shooting.  
Recording is paused.  
- If the POWER switch is set to on and off repeatedly.  
- If the camcorder is left powered off for several hours.  
- If the camcorder is subject to severe vibration while  
powered off.  
Press the REC button on the camcorder to the VTR  
button on the lens.  
Recording starts.  
- If for any other reason the automatic recording  
continuity function is unable to operate correctly.  
- If the lithium battery (CR2032) is exhausted, or if no  
lithium battery has been fitted.  
Note  
When the scan mode is 24P, see “Setting the CCD  
scan mode (DSR-450WS/450WSP only)” on page 107  
(DSR-450WS only).  
- If the recording format is changed.  
Using the edit search function while  
back space editing  
You can use the edit search function to find the desired  
tape location when continuing to record from any other  
location on the tape. Press and hold one of the EDIT  
SEARCH +FWD/–REV buttons to activate the search  
playback function for as long as you hold down it.  
62  
Back Space Editing  
   
You can select either 30S, 1M, 5M, 10M, 30M, or 1H.  
Here S means seconds (30S is 30 seconds), M means  
minutes (5M is 5 minutes), and H means hours (1H is  
one hour).  
Time-Lapse Video  
(Interval Rec)  
3
4
Set REC TIME (recording time for one recording  
session) on the FUNCTION 1 page of the  
OPERATION menu.  
Interval Rec mode is effective for shooting objects that  
move very slowly. As shown in the following figure, you  
need to set the recording time for one recording session  
(REC TIME) and the total time consisting of one recording  
session and the following interval (INTERVAL TIME).  
You can select either 0.5S, 1.0S, 1.5S, 2.0S, 5S, 10S,  
30S, 1M, 5M, or 10M.  
Here S means seconds (5S is 5 seconds) and M means  
minutes (1M is one minute).  
Total time consisting of one recording session  
and the following interval (INTERVAL TIME)  
To turn on the light automatically before starting to  
record, set PRE-LIGHTING (time to turn on the light  
before starting to record) on the FUNCTION 1 page of  
the OPERATION menu.  
You can select either OFF, 2S, 5S, or 10S.  
Recording  
time for one  
recording  
session(REC  
TIME)  
Notes  
• Set the LIGHT switch on the camcorder to AUTO to  
turn on the light before recording.  
The light switch must also be set to ON. With these  
settings, the light turns on and off automatically.  
However, the light remains on continuously if the  
off time is less than 5 seconds.  
• When the LIGHT switch is set to MAN and the light  
switch is set to ON, the light remains on  
continuously.  
A pre-lighting function is available. This function  
automatically turns on the light before recording starts,  
which allows you to record pictures under stable light and  
color temperature conditions.  
To end the menu operation, flick the MENU switch to  
OFF. The menu disappears from the screen and the  
message “INTERVAL” flashes along the bottom of  
the screen.  
Making settings before shooting  
To record in Interval Rec mode, you need to set the related  
items beforehand as follows.  
You can check the setting of Interval Rec in the VTR  
STATUS window (page 102).  
1
Set INTERVAL REC to ON on the FUNCTION 1  
page of the OPERATION menu.  
Note  
For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu  
The camcorder exits Interval Rec mode whenever it is  
powered off. However, the settings of INTERVAL TIME,  
REC TIME, etc. are maintained. You do not need to set  
them again the next time you use Interval Rec mode.  
? 03 FUNCTION1  
TOP  
ASSIGN SW <1>  
ASSIGN SW <2>  
ASSIGN SW <3>  
ASSIGN SW <4>  
DF/NDF  
:
:
:
:
:
ATW  
OFF  
OFF  
OFF  
DF  
INTERVAL REC  
REC TIME  
INTERVAL TIME  
PRE-LIGHTING  
:
:
:
:
ON  
0.5S  
30S  
Shooting and recording in Interval  
Rec mode  
OFF  
The camcorder is in Interval Rec mode. The TALLY  
indicator (green) in the viewfinder flashes (one flash/  
second) while the camcorder is in this mode.  
1
After performing the basic procedures for shooting  
and recording, following the instructions in “Making  
camcorder so that it will not move.  
2
Set INTERVAL TIME (total time consisting of one  
recording session and the following interval) on the  
FUNCTION 1 page of the OPERATION menu.  
2
Press the REC button on the camcorder or the VTR  
button on the lens.  
63  
Time-Lapse Video (Interval Rec)  
                   
The camcorder starts recording in Interval Rec mode.  
When you use the pre-lighting function, recording  
starts after the light is switched on.  
While recording in Interval Rec mode, the TALLY  
indicator (green) in the viewfinder flashes (4 flashes/  
second) and the message “INTERVAL” appears on  
the viewfinder screen.  
Recording Analog  
Composite Signals (with  
a CBK-SC01 Installed-  
DSR-450WS/450WSP  
only)  
While recording, the REC indicator in the viewfinder  
lights.  
To interrupt interval recording  
Installing a CBK-SC01 Composite Input Board in the  
camcorder enables you to record analog composite signals  
from external equipment connected to the GENLOCK IN  
connector.  
Press the REC button on the camcorder or the VTR button  
on the lens. The camcorder operates as explained below.  
When the button is pressed during interval  
recording  
Recording in Interval Rec mode stops. Press the REC or  
VTR button again to start recording in Interval Rec mode  
again.  
1
Set REC VIDEO SOURCE to EXT on the SOURCE  
SEL page of the OPERATION menu.  
For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu  
When the button is pressed during a pause of  
interval recording  
Recording in Interval Rec mode stops, and normal  
recording starts. Press the REC or VTR button again to  
interrupt recording. Press the REC or VTR button once  
again to start recording in Interval Rec mode.  
19 SOURCE SEL  
TOP  
EXT  
REC VIDEO SOURCE:  
SETUP REMOVE  
:ON  
To end auto interval recording  
You can exit Interval Rec mode by setting the POWER  
switch to OFF or setting INTERVAL REC to OFF on the  
FUNCTION 1 page of the OPERATION menu.  
2
Input analog composite signals to the GENLOCK IN  
connector of the camcorder.  
These signals are displayed on the viewfinder and the  
LCD monitor, and can be recorded on the tape.  
Notes on Auto Interval Rec mode  
Audio  
Audio fade-in/fade-out functions are not carried out in  
Interval Rec mode.  
Note  
Even when the GENLOCK item is set to OFF on the  
GENLOCK page of the MAINTENANCE menu, the  
camcorder is automatically synchronized with the external  
reference video signal when the external video signal is  
input to the GENLOCK IN connector in EXT mode. When  
the setting is switched to CAM mode, or when no signals  
are input even in EXT mode, the camcorder is reset to the  
original setting.  
Playback control buttons  
While recording in Interval Rec mode, you cannot use the  
playback control buttons (EJECT, REW, F FWD, PLAY,  
and STOP). To use these buttons, stop recording by  
pressing the REC button on the camcorder or the VTR  
button on the lens.  
Menu operation  
While recording in Interval Rec mode, you cannot change  
the settings of INTERVAL TIME and REC TIME. To  
change the settings, stop recording by pressing the REC  
button on the camcorder or the VTR button on the lens.  
To use setup remove (DSR-450WS only)  
Setup remove is a function that removes a setup that has  
been added to a video signal when recording. The factory  
setting of setup remove is ON.  
In order to set the setup remove function off, select OFF in  
SETUP REMOVE on the SOURCE SEL page of the  
OPERATION menu.  
64  
Recording Analog Composite Signals (with a CBK-SC01 Installed- DSR-450WS/450WSP only)  
       
Checking the recording on the color  
video monitor  
Playing and Checking  
Recorded Contents  
Connect a color video monitor to the MONITOR OUT  
connector or the VIDEO OUT connector of the camcorder.  
By pressing the PLAY button, you can view the recorded  
picture.  
By pressing the PLAY button, you can review any length  
of recording on the viewfinder screen in black and white or  
in color on the LCD monitor. There are two other ways to  
review the recording.  
Recording review: You can view the last two to ten  
seconds of the recording on the viewfinder screen in  
black and white or in color on the LCD monitor.  
Playback in external color video monitor: You can see  
the recording in color on a color video monitor without  
the need for any external adaptor.  
For details about how to connect a monitor, see  
Note  
For the DSR-450WS/450WSP, only the picture displayed  
through the camera is output to the CBK-SD01 SDI Output  
Board. Playback pictures cannot be output even during  
playback.  
For details about the switches and controls used to select  
the audio output signal and to adjust the audio level, see  
To use setup add (DSR-400/450WS only)  
Setup add is a function that adds a setup to the playback  
video signal. To activate this function, set SETUP ADD to  
ON on the VTR MODE page of the MAINTENANCE  
menu.  
Checking the recorded contents  
immediately after shooting —  
Recording Review  
Notes  
With recording paused, press the RET button on the lens.  
The tape is automatically rewound over the last  
approximately 2 seconds of the recording (approximately  
10 seconds maximum if you press and hold the RET  
button), and then this last part of the recording is shown in  
the viewfinder and on the LCD monitor. Use this function  
to check whether recording went correctly.  
• The video image that connects the DVCAM format and  
DV format is distorted during playback.  
• The camcorder can play video and audio that is recorded  
in DVCAM format or DV format (in SP mode).  
• If two or more audio sampling frequencies are mixed on  
one tape, the part where the video images are recorded in  
different frequencies will be distorted.  
By assigning the LENS RET function to the ASSIGN  
switch, you can use the switch in the same way as the lens  
RET button.  
Notes  
• During recording review, do not set the POWER switch  
to off. The camcorder may not be able to find the  
continue point.  
• You cannot start recording until the recording review has  
finished.  
65  
Playing and Checking Recorded Contents  
             
Menu Displays and  
Detailed Settings  
Chapter  
Menu Organization and Operation  
The following shows the organization of menus in this  
camcorder.  
For details about USER MENU CUSTOMIZE, see  
The USER menu consisting of items and pages registered  
at the factory is used. The number in parenthesis is the  
page number that setting is displayed on.  
Menu selection  
1st hierarchy  
USER  
2nd hierarchy  
3rd hierarchy  
Page 1  
Page 2  
Page 3  
Page 4  
IRIS OVERRIDE  
TOP MENU  
DETAIL LEVEL  
MASTER BLACK  
BLACK GAMMA  
MASTER BLK GAMMA  
COLOR TEMP <P>  
SKIN DETAIL ALL  
SKIN DETECT  
SKIN AREA IND  
SKIN DTL SELECT  
SKIN DETAIL  
SKIN DETAIL LVL  
SCN 1  
SCN 2  
SCN 3  
SCN 4  
SCN 5  
STANDARD  
REC FORMAT  
AU MODE  
16:9/4:3 SELECT 1)  
REC VIDEO SOURCE 2)  
REAR BNC OUT SEL 3)  
SCAN MODE 1)  
Page 5  
Page 6  
Page 7  
GL H PHASE  
GL SC PHASE  
GL SC 0/180 SEL  
MARKER  
CENTER  
SAFETY ZONE  
ASSIGN SW <1>  
ASSIGN SW <2>  
ASSIGN SW <3>  
ASSIGN SW <4>  
(Continued)  
(Continued)  
1) Only for the DSR-450WS/450WSP  
2) Only when a CBK-SC01 Composite Input Board is installed in the DSR-  
450WS/450WSP  
3) Only when a CBK-SD01 SDI Output Board is installed in the DSR-  
450WS/450WSP  
66  
Menu Organization and Operation  
     
Menu selection  
1st hierarchy  
2nd hierarchy  
3rd hierarchy  
CLOCK ADJUST  
Page 8  
HOUR  
MIN  
SEC  
YEAR  
USER MENU CUSTOMIZE  
ALL  
MONTH  
DAY  
OPERATION  
LCD BRIGHT <L>  
LCD BRIGHT <H>  
LCD COLOR  
OUTPUT  
REAR BNC OUT SEL 2)  
MONI OUT VFDISP  
MONI OUT MENU  
MONI OUT TC  
MONITOR OUT  
MONI OUT MARKER  
MONI OUT ZEBRA  
ASSIGN SW <1>  
ASSIGN SW <2>  
ASSIGN SW <3>  
ASSIGN SW <4>  
DF/NDF 3)  
FUNCTION 1  
INTERVAL REC  
REC TIME  
INTERVAL TIME  
PRE-LIGHTING  
D5600  
FUNCTION 2  
WIDE AWB  
WHITE SWITCH <B>  
SHOCKLESS WHITE  
ATW SPEED  
LOW LIGHT  
LOW LIGHT LEVEL  
VF BATT WARNING  
VF DISP  
VF DISP 1  
VF DISP MODE  
DISP EXTENDER  
DISP FILTER  
DISP WHITE  
DISP GAIN  
DISP SHUTTER  
DISP AUDIO  
DISP TAPE  
DISP IRIS  
DISP COLOR TEMP  
DISP BATT REMAIN  
DISP DC IN  
VF DISP 2  
DISP 16:9/4:3 ID 1)  
DISP VTR STATUS  
DISP VTR TRIGGER  
DISP TIME CODE  
DISP REC FORMAT  
MARKER  
MARKER 1  
CENTER  
SAFETY ZONE  
SAFETY AREA  
ASPECT 1)  
ASPECT SELECT 1)  
ASPECT MASK(4:3) 1)  
ASPECT MASK LVL 1)  
100%MARKER  
(Continued)  
(Continued)  
1) Only for the DSR-450WS/450WSP  
2) Only when a CBK-SD01 SDI Output Board is installed in the DSR-  
450WS/450WSP  
3) Only for the DSR-400/450WS  
67  
Menu Organization and Operation  
Menu selection  
2nd hierarchy  
3rd hierarchy  
USER BOX  
1st hierarchy  
MARKER 2  
USER BOX WIDTH  
USER BOX HEIGHT  
USER BOX H POS  
USER BOX V POS  
CENTER H POS  
CENTER V POS  
GAIN LOW  
GAIN MID  
GAIN SW  
GAIN HIGH  
GAIN TURBO  
TURBO SW IND  
ZEBRA  
VF SETTING  
ZEBRA SELECT  
ZEBRA1 DET LEVEL  
ZEBRA1 APT LEVEL  
ZEBRA2 DET LEVEL  
VF DETAIL LEVEL  
VF ASPECT 1)  
IRIS OVERRIDE  
IRIS SPEED  
AUTO IRIS  
CLIP HIGH LIGHT  
IRIS WINDOW  
IRIS WINDOW IND  
IRIS VAR WIDTH  
IRIS VAR HEIGHT  
IRIS VAR H POS  
IRIS VAR V POS  
ID-1  
ID-2  
ID-3  
ID-4  
SHOT ID  
SHOT DATE  
SHOT TIME  
SHOT DISP  
SHOT MODEL NAME  
SHOT SERIAL NO  
SHOT ID SEL  
SHOT 16:9 ID 1)  
SHOT BLINK CHARA  
STATUS CAMERA  
STATUS VTR  
SET STATUS  
OFFSET WHT  
OFFSET WHITE <A>  
WARM-COOL <A>  
COLOR FINE <A>  
OFFSET WHITE <B>  
WARM-COOL <B>  
COLOR FINE <B>  
SHUTTER SLS 1)  
SHUTTER ECS  
SHT ENABLE  
SHUTTER 1/32 2)  
SHUTTER 1/33 3)  
SHUTTER 1/40 4)  
SHUTTER 1/48 2)  
SHUTTER 1/50 3)  
SHUTTER 1/60 5)  
SHUTTER 1/96 2)  
SHUTTER 1/100 6)  
SHUTTER 1/120 4)  
SHUTTER 1/125  
SHUTTER 1/250  
SHUTTER 1/500  
SHUTTER 1/1000  
SHUTTER 1/2000  
(Continued)  
(Continued)  
1) Only for the DSR-450WS/450WSP  
2) Only for 24P mode  
6) Only for I (interlace scan) mode and a video output signal set to NTSC, or  
for PsF (progressive scan) mode and a video output signal set to PAL  
3) Only for PsF (progressive scan) mode and a video output signal set to PAL  
4) Only for PsF (progressive scan) mode and a video output signal set to  
NTSC  
5) Only for I (interlace scan) mode and a video output signal set to PAL, or  
for PsF (progressive scan) mode and a video output signal set to NTSC  
68  
Menu Organization and Operation  
Menu selection  
3rd hierarchy  
1st hierarchy  
2nd hierarchy  
LENS FILE  
LENS FILE SELECT  
F.ID  
FORMAT  
16:9/4:3 SELECT 2)  
WIDE ID 2)  
SCAN MODE 2)  
24P PULLDWN MODE 3)  
DF/NDF 3)  
SOURCE SEL 1)  
SW STATUS  
REC VIDEO SOURCE  
SETUP REMOVE 3)  
PAINT  
GAMMA  
CHROMA  
MATRIX  
KNEE  
WHITE CLIP  
DETAIL  
APERTURE  
FLARE  
EVS  
TEST SAW  
WHITE  
COLOR TEMP <A>  
COLOR FINE <A>  
R GAIN <A>  
B GAIN <A>  
D5600K <A>  
COLOR TEMP <B>  
COLOR FINE <B>  
R GAIN <B>  
B GAIN <B>  
D5600K <B>  
BLACK/FLARE  
MASTER BLACK  
R BLACK  
B BLACK  
MASTER FLARE  
R FLARE  
G FLARE  
B FLARE  
FLARE  
GAMMA  
GAMMA  
STEP GAMMA  
MASTER GAMMA  
R GAMMA  
G GAMMA  
B GAMMA  
GAMMA SELECT 2)  
GAMMA SEL(STD)  
GAMMA SEL(FILM)2)  
BLACK GAMMA  
BLACK GAMMA  
BLK GAM RANGE  
MASTER BLK GAMMA  
R BLACK GAMMA  
G BLACK GAMMA  
B BLACK GAMMA  
KNEE  
KNEE  
KNEE POINT  
KNEE SLOPE  
KNEE SATURATION  
KNEE SAT LEVEL  
WHITE CLIP  
WHITE CLIP LEVEL  
DETAIL 1  
DETAIL  
APERTURE  
DETAIL LEVEL  
APERTURE LEVEL  
DTL H/V RATIO  
CRISPENING  
(Continued)  
(Continued)  
LEVEL DEPEND  
LEVEL DEPEND LVL  
DETAIL FREQUENCY  
1) Only when a CBK-SC01 Composite Input Board is installed in the DSR-  
450WS/450WSP  
2) Only for the DSR-450WS/450WSP  
3) Only for the DSR-450WS  
69  
Menu Organization and Operation  
Menu selection  
1st hierarchy  
2nd hierarchy  
DETAIL 2  
3rd hierarchy  
KNEE APERTURE  
KNEE APT LVL  
DETAIL COMB  
CROSS COLOR  
CROSS COLOR LVL  
DETAIL LIMIT  
DTL WHT LMT  
DTL BLK LMT  
DTL V-BLK LMT  
DETAIL 3  
FINE DTL  
FINE DTL LVL  
V DTL CREATION  
H/V CONTROL MODE  
SKIN DETAIL  
SKIN DETAIL ALL  
SKIN DETECT  
SKIN AREA IND  
SKIN DTL SELECT  
SKIN DETAIL  
SKIN DETAIL LVL  
SKIN DTL SAT  
SKIN DTL HUE  
SKIN DTL WIDTH  
MTX LINEAR  
MATRIX  
MATRIX(USER)  
MATRIX(PRESET)  
MATRIX R-G  
MATRIX R-B  
MATRIX G-R  
MATRIX G-B  
MATRIX B-R  
MATRIX B-G  
MTX MULTI  
MATRIX  
MATRIX(MULTI)  
MATRIX AREA IND  
MATRIX COLOR DET  
MTX(MULTI)AXIS  
MTX(MULTI)HUE  
MTX(MULTI)SAT  
V MODULATION  
LOW KEY SAT  
VMOD  
MASTER VMOD  
R VMOD  
G VMOD  
B VMOD  
LOW KEY SAT  
L.KEY SAT LEVEL  
L.KEY SAT RANGE  
Y BLACK GAMMA  
Y BLK GAM LEVEL  
Y BLK GAM RANGE  
SCENE FILE  
1
2
3
4
5
STANDARD  
SCENE RECALL  
SCENE STORE  
F. ID  
WHITE SHADING  
WHT SHAD CH SEL  
R/G/B WHT H SAW  
R/G/B WHT H PARA  
R/G/B WHT V SAW  
R/G/B WHT V PARA  
WHITE SAW/PARA  
MAINTENANCE  
(Continued)  
(Continued)  
70  
Menu Organization and Operation  
2nd hierarchy  
3rd hierarchy  
1st hierarchy  
Menu selection  
BLK SHAD CH SEL  
BLACK SHADING  
R/G/B BLK H SAW  
R/G/B BLK H PARA  
R/G/B BLK V SAW  
R/G/B BLK V PARA  
BLACK SAW/PARA  
MASTER BLACK  
MASTER GAIN(TMP)  
<Sony Info>  
BEFORE END 1  
END1  
BATTERY  
<Sony>  
BEFORE END 2  
END 2  
<Others, EXT DC>  
BEFORE END 3  
END 3  
AU MODE  
AUDIO  
AU HEADROOM  
AU FADE  
AU SG(1KHz)  
F AUDIO VOL  
REC TALLY BLINK  
STBY OFF TIMER  
REC FORMAT  
VTR MODE  
SETUP ADD 1)  
COLOR TEMP <P>  
COLOR FINE <P>  
R GAIN <P>  
PRESET WHT  
B GAIN <P>  
D5600K <P>  
AWB ENABLE <P>  
DCC FUNCTION SEL  
DCC D RANGE  
DCC POINT  
DCC GAIN  
DCC DELAY TIME  
DCC ADJUST  
AUTO IRIS 2  
IRIS WINDOW  
IRIS WINDOW IND  
IRIS LEVEL  
IRIS APL RATIO  
IRIS VAR WIDTH  
IRIS VAR HEIGHT  
IRIS VAR H POS  
IRIS VAR V POS  
IRIS SPEED  
CLIP HIGH LIGHT  
WHT FILTER INH  
COLOR BAR SEL  
REC TALLY  
FUNCTION 3  
USER & ALL ONLY  
RM COMMON MEMORY 2)  
RM REC START 2)  
i.LINK CTL  
i.LINK CTL(END)  
GENLOCK  
GENLOCK  
GL H PHASE  
GL SC PHASE  
GL SC 0/180 SEL  
ND OFFSET ADJUST  
CLEAR ND OFFSET  
ND COMP  
AUTO BLK SHADING  
RESET BLK SHD  
AUTO SHADING  
(Continued)  
MASTER GAIN(TMP)  
1) Only for the DSR-400/450WS  
2) Only for the DSR-450WS/450WSP  
71  
Menu Organization and Operation  
Menu selection  
2nd hierarchy  
3rd hierarchy  
1st hierarchy  
FILE  
USER FILE LOAD  
USER FILE  
USER FILE SAVE  
F. ID  
USER PRESET  
STORE USR PRESET  
CLEAR USR PRESET  
CUSTOMIZE RESET  
LOAD CUSTOM DATA  
LOAD OUT OF USER  
BEFORE FILE PAGE  
USER LOAD WHITE  
USER FILE 2  
ALL FILE LOAD  
ALL FILE SAVE  
F. ID  
ALL FILE  
ALL PRESET  
STORE ALL PRESET  
CLEAR ALL PRESET  
1
2
SCENE FILE  
3
4
5
STANDARD  
SCENE RECALL  
SCENE STORE  
F. ID  
REFERENCE STORE  
REFERENCE CLEAR  
REFERENCE LOAD  
REFERENCE SAVE  
F. ID  
REFERENCE  
LENS FILE 1  
LENS FILE 2  
SCENE WHITE DATA  
LENS FILE RECALL  
LENS FILE STORE  
F. ID  
LENS NO OFFSET  
SOURCE  
IRIS GAIN  
LENS M VMOD  
LENS CENTER H  
LENS CENTER V  
LENS R FLARE  
LENS G FLARE  
LENS B FLARE  
LENS W-R OFST  
LENS W-B OFST  
SHADING CH SEL  
LENS R/G/B H SAW  
LENS R/G/B H PARA  
LENS R/G/B V SAW  
LENS R/G/B V PARA  
LENS FILE 3  
M.S. FORMAT  
M.S. IN > JUMP TO  
MEMORY STICK  
(Continued)  
72  
Menu Organization and Operation  
Menu selection  
2nd hierarchy  
3rd hierarchy  
1st hierarchy  
HOURS METER  
RESET METER  
DIAGNOSIS  
DRUM RUNNING  
TAPE RUNNING  
OPERATION  
THREADING  
DRUM RUNNING-2  
TAPE RUNNING-2  
OPERATION-2  
THREADING-2  
TIME/DATE  
CLOCK ADJUST  
HOUR  
MIN  
SEC  
YEAR  
MONTH  
DAY  
DEV STATUS 1  
I/O  
FP1  
FP2  
CN  
FRAM  
AT  
EEPROM  
DCP1  
DCP2  
PA  
LSI  
PX  
BCS  
SCI  
SY  
RM 1)  
DEV STATUS 2  
AUTO CHECK  
HUMID TIMER RESET  
OPTION BOARD 1)  
SDI OUTPUT  
COMPOSITE VIDEO INPUT  
1) Only for the DSR-450WS/450WSP  
The TOP menu  
The TOP menu consists of the following submenus.  
The USER menu  
This menu allows you to add items from the  
OPERATION, PAINT, MAINTENANCE, FILE, and  
DIAGNOSIS menus to suit your needs. By gathering  
frequently used items on the USER menu beforehand, you  
can call up them quickly whenever you need them.  
Usually by flicking the MENU switch to ON, the USER  
menu is displayed.  
<TOP MENU>  
USER  
USER MENU CUSTOMIZE  
ALL  
OPERATION  
PAINT  
MAINTENANCE  
FILE  
DIAGNOSIS  
When you select an item in the TOP menu, this displays  
the most recently shown page of the corresponding  
submenu. When the submenu is selected for the first time,  
the CONTENTS page appears.  
The USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu  
This menu allows you to add pages to or delete pages from  
the USER menu to suit your needs.  
The ALL menu  
This menu contains all items of the OPERATION, PAINT,  
MAINTENANCE, FILE, and DIAGNOSIS menus as they  
are in one menu.  
73  
Menu Organization and Operation  
   
The scene file  
The OPERATION menu  
In the scene file, the setting values of event items adjusted  
to shoot a particular scene are saved. You can save up to  
five scene files in the camcorder memory and up to 100  
scene files in a “Memory Stick”. For example, first adjust  
the settings to shoot a particular scene at the rehearsal and  
then save them as a scene file. Then load this file before the  
actual shooting so that you can quickly recreate setup  
conditions that are the same as those in rehearsal.  
This menu contains items for changing settings according  
to conditions related to the subject when the camcorder is  
being operated.  
The PAINT menu  
This menu contains items for making detailed image  
adjustments while using a waveform monitor to monitor  
the waveforms output by the camera. Support of a video  
engineer is usually required to use this menu. Although  
you can also use an external remote control unit to set the  
items on this menu, this menu is effective when using the  
camcorder by itself outdoors.  
Items included in the scene file are marked with an “Sc”  
in the “File” column on the menu list.  
The reference file  
In the reference file, the reference setting values used when  
executing SCENE FILE STANDARD (page 116) are  
saved. You can save one reference file in a “Memory  
Stick”. If the reference file is not saved, the factory default  
values are used as reference values.  
The MAINTENANCE menu  
This menu contains items for performing camera  
maintenance operations, such as changing the VTR system  
or using infrequently used paint items.  
Items included in the reference file are marked with an  
“R” in the “File” column on the menu list.  
The FILE menu  
This menu is for saving the adjusted data in the camcorder  
memory or in a “Memory Stick”. The following files can  
be saved.  
The lens file  
In the lens file, the setting data used to compensate for the  
characteristics of lenses, such as flare, white shading, auto  
iris gain, center marker position, and compensation value  
of extender white, is saved. You can save up to 16 lens files  
in the camcorder memory and up to 100 lens files in a  
“Memory Stick”.  
The user file  
In the user file, the setting items and setting data of the  
customized USER menu are saved. Once you save the user  
file in a “Memory Stick”, you can easily set the USER  
menu to your preference by loading the data from the  
“Memory Stick”.  
Items included in the lens file are marked with an “L” in  
the “File” column on the menu list.  
For details on the user file, see “Saving and Loading User  
The DIAGNOSIS menu  
This menu enables you to confirm the VTR status or  
identify a failed circuit board.  
The ALL file  
In the ALL file, the setting data of all of the menus are  
saved. Once a camcorder is set according to your  
preferences and you save its ALL file in a “Memory  
Stick”, you can easily set other camcorders to the settings  
of the camcorder that you already set by loading the data  
from the “Memory Stick”.  
Items included in the ALL file are marked with an “A” in  
the “File” column on the menu list.  
The preset file  
In the preset file, the preset values of setting items in the  
menu are saved. You can save the preset file in the built-in  
memory of the camcorder.  
Items included in the preset file are marked with a “P” in  
the “File” column on the menu list.  
74  
Menu Organization and Operation  
 
Menu list  
The pages of the menu that have been registered in the  
USER menu at the factory are indicated by the page (Page1  
to 8) in the “USER menu” column.  
The USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu allows you to add  
and delete pages in the USER menu to suit your  
requirements.  
value. The setting range shown on the menu screen may  
differ from what is shown in the manual.  
The “File” column  
The letters in the “File” column stand for the following.  
A: Items saved in the ALL file  
P: Items saved in the preset file  
Sc: Items saved in the scene file  
R: Items saved in the reference file  
Note  
L: Items saved in the lens file  
When the setting range in the “Settings” column is  
St: Items changed in value by the STANDARD operation  
surrounded by parentheses ( ), the setup value is a relative  
The OPERATION menu  
Page  
Item  
Settings  
Default  
USER Description  
menu  
File  
OUTPUT  
LCD BRIGHT <L>  
LCD BRIGHT <H>  
LCD COLOR  
–32 to 31  
0
Adjusts brightness of the LCD monitor A P  
when the LCD button is set to L.  
Adjusts brightness of the LCD monitor  
when the LCD button is set to H.  
Adjusts the color strength of the LCD  
monitor.  
REAR BNC OUT  
SEL  
(when option board is  
installed)  
VBS/SDI  
VBS  
ON  
MONITOR  
OUT  
MONI OUT VFDISP OFF/ON  
Selects whether or not the VF DISP  
display signal is mixed to the output  
signal from the MONITOR OUT  
connector.  
A P  
MONI OUT MENU  
Selects whether or not the MENU  
display signal is mixed to the output  
signal from the MONITOR OUT  
connector.  
MONI OUT TC  
OFF  
Selects whether or not the time code  
is mixed to the output signal from the  
MONITOR OUT connector.  
MONI OUT MARKER  
MONI OUT ZEBRA  
Selects whether or not the marker  
signal is mixed to the output signal  
from the MONITOR OUT connector.  
Selects whether or not the ZEBRA  
display signal is mixed to the output  
signal from the MONITOR OUT  
connector.  
75  
Menu Organization and Operation  
         
Page  
Item  
Settings  
Default  
USER Description  
menu  
File  
FUNCTION 1 ASSIGN SW <1>  
ASSIGN SW <2>  
OFF/  
ATW  
OFF  
MARKER/  
ATW/LENS  
RET/REC  
SWITCH/  
TURBO  
ASSIGN SW <3>  
ASSIGN SW <4>  
SWITCH  
DF/NDF  
DF/NDF  
DF  
Switches between drop frame (DF)  
mode and non-drop frame (NDF)  
mode.  
INTERVAL REC  
REC TIME  
OFF/ON  
OFF  
0.5S  
0.5S/1.0S/  
1.5S/2.0S/5S/  
10S/30S/1M/  
5M/10M  
INTERVAL TIME  
PRE–LIGHTING  
30S/1M/5M/  
10M/30M/1H  
1H  
OFF/2SEC/  
5SEC/10SEC  
OFF  
OFF  
FUNCTION 2 D5600  
OFF/ON  
Turns on and off the function which  
electrically applies a 5600K color  
temperature filter (effective only when  
WIDE AWB is set to OFF).  
A P Sc St  
A P  
WIDE AWB  
OFF/ON  
ON  
Turns on and off the function which  
widens the range adjustable by Auto  
White Balance.  
WHITE SWTCH <B> MEM/ATW  
MEM  
1
Sets the function of the WHITE BAL  
switch when it is set to B.  
SHOCKLESS  
WHITE  
OFF/1/2/3  
Changes the white gain smoothly  
when operating the WHITE BAL  
switch.  
ATW SPEED  
LOW LIGHT  
1/2/3/4/5  
OFF/ON  
4
Sets the convergence speed for Auto  
Tracing White balance.  
OFF  
Turns the warning display on or off  
when the video average level is less  
than the preset value.  
LOW LIGHT LEVEL  
(–99 to 99)  
0
Sets the level at which the LOW  
LIGHT function becomes effective.  
VF BATT WARNING 10% / 20%  
10%  
Sets the threshold value of remaining  
battery capacity to make the  
remaining capacity indication flash on  
the viewfinder screen.  
VF DISP 1  
VF DISP  
OFF/ON  
Depends  
on the  
switch  
VF DISP MODE  
DISP EXTENDER  
DISP FILTER  
DISP WHITE  
DISP GAIN  
1/2/3  
3
A P  
OFF/ON  
ON  
DISP SHUTTER  
DISP AUDIO  
DISP TAPE  
DISP IRIS  
76  
Menu Organization and Operation  
       
Page  
Item  
Settings  
Default  
USER Description  
menu  
File  
VF DISP 2  
DISP COLOR TEMP OFF/ON  
OFF  
INT  
A P  
DISP BATT REMAIN AUTO/VOLT/  
INT  
DISP DC IN  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
OFF  
ON  
DISP 16:9/4:3 ID  
DISP VTR STATUS  
DISP VTR TRIGGER  
DISP TIME CODE  
DISP REC FORMAT  
MARKER  
OFF  
OFF  
MARKER 1  
A P  
CENTER  
SAFETY ZONE  
SAFETY AREA  
80% / 90% /  
92% / 95%  
90%  
ASPECT  
OFF/ON  
OFF  
4:3  
ASPECT SELECT  
4:3/13:9/14:9  
ASPECT MASK (4:3) OFF/ON  
OFF  
1/4  
ASPECT MASK LVL 1/2, 1/4, 1/8  
100% MARKER  
USER BOX  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
1 to 465  
OFF  
OFF  
245  
MARKER 2  
Turns the box cursor on or off.  
A P  
USER BOX WIDTH  
Width (from the center to right or left  
side)  
USER BOX HEIGHT NTSC: 1 to  
72  
Height (from the center to top or  
bottom)  
120  
PAL: 1 to 142  
USER BOX H POS  
USER BOX V POS  
–461 to 461  
0
0
Horizontal position of the center  
Vertical position of the center  
NTSC: –119 to  
118  
PAL: –141 to  
140  
CENTER H POS  
–48 to 47  
0
0
Horizontal position of the center  
marker  
CENTER V POS  
GAIN LOW  
–15 to 14  
Vertical position of the center marker  
GAIN SW  
–3dB/0dB/3dB/ 0dB  
6dB/9dB/12dB/  
18dB/24dB/  
30dB/36dB  
GAIN MID  
9dB  
GAIN HIGH  
18dB  
36dB  
OFF  
OFF  
1
GAIN TURBO  
TURBO SW IND  
OFF/ON  
OFF/ON  
1/2/BOTH  
VF SETTING ZEBRA  
ZEBRA SELECT  
100.  
ZEBRA1 DET LVL  
ZEBRA1 APT LVL  
ZEBRA2 DET LVL  
20% to 107% 70%  
(in 1% steps)  
1% to 10%  
10%  
(in 1% steps)  
52% to 109% 100%  
(in 1% steps)  
VF DETAIL LEVEL  
VF ASPECT  
(–99 to 99)  
AUTO/16:9  
0
AUTO  
77  
Menu Organization and Operation  
     
Page  
Item  
Settings  
Default  
USER Description  
menu  
File  
AUTO IRIS  
IRIS OVERRIDE  
IRIS SPEED  
OFF/ON  
(–99 to 99)  
OFF/ON  
OFF  
0
A P  
Adjusts the speed of automatic iris.  
A P Sc R St  
A P  
CLIP HIGH LIGHT  
OFF  
Turns the function that ignores  
detection of very bright highlights or  
reacts slowly to them on or off.  
IRIS WINDOW  
1/2/3/4/5/VAR  
OFF/ON  
1
A P R St  
IRIS WINDOW IND  
IRIS VAR WIDTH  
IRIS VAR HEIGHT  
OFF  
245  
20 to 465  
A P  
NTSC: 20 to  
120  
NTSC:  
72  
PAL: 20 to 142 PAL: 85  
IRIS VAR H POS  
IRIS VAR V POS  
–452 to 452  
0
0
NTSC: –101 to  
100  
PAL: –122 to  
122  
SHOT ID  
ID-1  
Displays  
Blank  
OFF  
101.  
A
character input  
mode (up to 12  
characters).  
ID-2  
ID-3  
ID-4  
SHOT DISP  
SHOT DATE  
SHOT TIME  
OFF/ON  
A P  
SHOT MODEL  
NAME  
SHOT SERIAL NO  
SHOT ID SEL  
OFF/ID-1/ID-2/  
ID-3/ID-4  
SHOT 16:9 ID  
OFF/ON  
OFF  
OFF  
SHOT BLINK  
CHARA  
SET STATUS STATUS CAMERA  
STATUS VTR  
OFF/ON  
ON  
A P  
OFFSET WHT OFFSET WHITE <A> OFF/ON  
OFF  
WARM-COOL <A>  
Display color  
3200  
temperature  
(converted  
from R/B  
Gain).  
COLOR FINE <A>  
(–99 to 99)  
0
OFFSET WHITE <B> OFF/ON  
OFF  
3200  
WARM-COOL <B>  
Display color  
temperature  
(converted  
from R/B  
Gain).  
COLOR FINE <B>  
(–99 to 99)  
0
78  
Menu Organization and Operation  
 
Page  
Item  
Settings  
Default  
USER Description  
menu  
File  
SHT ENABLE SHUTTER SLS  
SHUTTER ECS  
SHUTTER 1/32  
OFF/ON  
ON  
The items which can be set differ  
depending on the CCD scan mode  
setting (page 108).  
SHUTTER 1/33  
SHUTTER 1/40  
SHUTTER 1/48  
SHUTTER 1/50  
SHUTTER 1/60  
SHUTTER 1/96  
SHUTTER 1/100  
SHUTTER 1/120  
SHUTTER 1/125  
SHUTTER 1/250  
SHUTTER 1/500  
SHUTTER 1/1000  
SHUTTER 1/2000  
LENS FILE  
FORMAT  
LENS FILE SELECT 1 to 17 (17  
only when  
1
106.  
L
serial lens  
connected)  
F.ID  
Displays file  
name.  
Blank  
16:9  
ON  
16:9/4:3 SELECT  
WIDE ID  
16:9 / 4:3  
OFF/ON  
Selects whether to add wide aspect  
identifying signal to video signal in  
16:9 mode.  
SCAN MODE  
NTSC: I/PsF/  
24P  
PAL: I/PsF  
I
A P Sc R St  
AP  
24P PULLDWN  
MODE  
2.3/2.3.3.2  
DF/NDF  
2.3  
DF  
the scan mode is set to 24P.  
DF/NDF  
Switches between drop frame (DF)  
mode and non-drop frame (NDF)  
mode.  
SOURCE SEL REC VIDEO  
SOURCE  
CAM/EXT  
OFF/ON  
CAM  
ON  
Page4 See “Recording Analog Composite  
A P  
Signals (with a CBK-SC01 Installed-  
DSR-450WS/450WSP only)” on page  
64.  
SETUP REMOVE  
79  
Menu Organization and Operation  
     
The PAINT menu  
Page  
Item  
Settings  
Default  
USER Description  
menu  
File  
SW STATUS  
GAMMA  
OFF/ON  
ON  
Turns the gamma correction on or off. A P Sc St  
CHROMA  
Turns the chroma of the composite  
signal on or off.  
MATRIX  
Turns the linear matrix correction on  
or off.  
A P Sc R St  
KNEE  
Turns the knee correction on or off.  
WHITE CLIP  
Turns the white clipping correction on A P Sc St  
or off.  
DETAIL  
Turns the detail signal on or off.  
Turns the aperture function on or off.  
Turns the flare function on or off.  
APERTURE  
FLARE  
EVS  
OFF  
OFF  
Turns the EVS shutter on or off.  
Selects the test signal.  
A P Sc R St  
A P St  
TEST SAW  
OFF/SAW/  
REC  
WHITE  
COLOR TEMP <A> Display color  
temperature  
3200  
Sets the color temperature of WHITE A P Sc St  
A.  
(converted  
from R/B gain).  
COLOR FINE <A>  
(–99 to 99)  
0
Adjusts the value more precisely  
when the color temperature  
adjustment through COLOR TEMP is  
not satisfactory.  
R GAIN <A>  
B GAIN <A>  
D5600K <A>  
Only the value of R GAIN is changed.  
Only the value of B GAIN is changed.  
OFF/ON  
OFF  
Turns the WHITE A electronic 5600K  
filter on or off.  
COLOR TEMP <B> Display color  
temperature  
3200  
Sets the color temperature of WHITE  
B.  
(converted  
from R/B gain).  
COLOR FINE <B>  
(–99 to 99)  
0
Adjusts the value more precisely  
when the color temperature  
adjustment through COLOR TEMP is  
not satisfactory.  
R GAIN <B>  
B GAIN <B>  
D5600K <B>  
Only the value of R GAIN is changed.  
Only the value of B GAIN is changed.  
OFF/ON  
OFF  
0
Turns the WHITE B electronic 5600K  
filter on or off.  
BLACK/  
FLARE  
MASTER BLACK  
R BLACK  
(–99 to 99)  
Page1 Adjusts the black level of the master. A P Sc R St  
Adjusts the R black level.  
Adjusts the B black level.  
Adjusts the flare level of the master.  
Adjusts the R flare level.  
Adjusts the G flare level.  
Adjusts the B flare level.  
A P Sc St  
B BLACK  
MASTER FLARE  
R FLARE  
A P Sc R St  
G FLARE  
B FLARE  
FLARE  
OFF/ON  
ON  
Turns the flare correction circuit on or A P Sc St  
off.  
80  
Menu Organization and Operation  
           
Page  
Item  
Settings  
Default  
ON  
USER Description  
menu  
File  
GAMMA  
GAMMA  
OFF/ON  
Turns the gamma correction function A P Sc St  
on or off.  
STEP GAMMA  
MASTER GAMMA  
0.35 to 0.90  
(in 0.05 steps)  
0.45  
0
Sets the master gamma correction  
curve in steps.  
A P Sc R St  
(–99 to 99)  
Sets the master gamma correction  
curve.  
R GAMMA  
Sets the R gamma correction curve.  
Sets the G gamma correction curve.  
Sets the B gamma correction curve.  
Selects the gamma table.  
G GAMMA  
B GAMMA  
GAMMA SELECT  
GAM SEL (STD)  
GAM SEL (FILM)  
BLACK GAMMA  
STD/FILM  
1 to 6  
STD  
3
Selects the gamma table of STD.  
Selects the gamma table of FILM.  
1 to 5  
1
BLACK  
GAMMA  
OFF/ON  
ON  
Page1 Turns the black gamma correction on A P Sc R St  
or off.  
BLK GAMMA  
RANGE  
LOW/L.MID/  
H.MID/HIGH  
HIGH  
0
Sets the range affected by black  
gamma.  
MASTER BLK  
GAMMA  
(–99 to 99)  
Page1 Adjusts the black gamma of the  
master.  
R BLACK GAMMA  
G BLACK GAMMA  
B BLACK GAMMA  
KNEE  
Sets the correction curve of the R  
black gamma.  
Sets the correction curve of the G  
black gamma.  
Sets the correction curve of the B  
black gamma.  
KNEE  
OFF/ON  
ON  
Turns the knee correction circuit on or A P Sc R St  
off.  
KNEE POINT  
50.0 to 109.0  
(in 0.1 steps)  
100.0  
Sets the knee point level.  
KNEE SLOPE  
(–99 to 99)  
0
Set the knee slope level.  
KNEE SATURATION OFF/ON  
ON  
Turns the knee saturation function on  
or off.  
KNEE SAT LEVEL  
WHITE CLIP  
(–99 to 99)  
OFF/ON  
0
Sets the knee saturation level.  
ON  
Turns the white clipping function on or A P Sc St  
off.  
WHITE CLIP LEVEL 100.0 to 109.5 NTSC:  
Adjusts the white clipping level.  
A P Sc R St  
(in 0.1 steps)  
109.0  
PAL:  
105.0  
81  
Menu Organization and Operation  
         
Page  
Item  
Settings  
Default  
USER Description  
menu  
File  
DETAIL 1  
DETAIL  
OFF/ON  
ON  
Turns the detail correction function on A P Sc St  
or off.  
APERTURE  
DETAIL LEVEL  
Turns the aperture correction function  
on or off.  
(–99 to 99)  
OFF/ON  
0
Page1 Sets the general level of the detail  
signal.  
A P Sc R St  
APERTURE LEVEL  
DTL H/V RATIO  
CRISPENING  
Sets the aperture level.  
Sets the level of the V detail signal.  
Sets the crispening level.  
LEVEL DEPEND  
ON  
0
Turns the level depend function on or  
off.  
LEVEL DEPEND LVL (–99 to 99)  
Sets the level of the level depend.  
DETAIL  
FREQUENCY  
Sets the frequency of the H detail  
signal.  
DETAIL 2  
KNEE APERTURE  
OFF/ON  
OFF  
0
Turns the knee aperture function on  
or off.  
A P Sc R St  
KNEE APT LVL  
DETAIL COMB  
(–99 to 99)  
–99 to 0  
Sets the knee aperture level.  
Sets the level at which the comb filter  
becomes effective.  
CROSS COLOR  
OFF/ON  
OFF  
43  
0
Turns the cross color component on  
or off.  
CROSS COLOR LVL 0 to 99  
Sets the suppression level of the  
cross color.  
DETAIL LIMIT  
(–99 to 99)  
Sets the both detail black and white  
limiters.  
DTL WHT LMT  
DTL BLK LMT  
DTL V-BLK LMT  
FINE DTL  
Sets the detail white limiter.  
Sets the detail black limiter.  
Sets the V detail black limiter.  
DETAIL 3  
OFF/ON  
OFF  
0
Turns the fine detail function on or off. A P Sc R St  
FINE DTL LVL  
(–99 to 99)  
Sets the level at which the fine detail  
function becomes effective.  
V DTL CREATION  
NAM/G/R+G/Y R+G  
Selects the source signal of the V  
DTL signal.  
H/V CONTROL  
MODE  
H/V, V  
V
Select the operation mode of DETAIL  
H/V RATIO on the DETAIL 1 page. (H/  
V: H and V both enabled, V: V DTL  
only enabled)  
SKIN DETAIL SKIN DETAIL ALL  
SKIN DETECT  
OFF/ON  
OFF  
Page2 Sets ON or OFF of all the skin detail. A P Sc R St  
Moves to color EXEC  
detection  
Detects the color for skin detail (page  
60).  
page.  
SKIN AREA IND  
OFF/ON  
OFF  
1
Sets the indicator of detected color.  
Selects the skin detail.  
St  
SKIN DTL SELECT 1/2/3  
SKIN DETAIL  
OFF/ON  
ON  
Sets ON or OFF of the skin detail  
selected in SKIN DTL SELECT.  
A P Sc R St  
SKIN DETAIL LVL  
SKIN DTL SAT  
(–99 to 99)  
0
Sets the detail level of detected color.  
Adjusts the saturation level for skin  
detail.  
SKIN DTL HUE  
Adjusts the center phase for skin  
detail.  
SKIN DTL WIDTH  
0 to 359  
40  
Adjusts the width for skin detail.  
82  
Menu Organization and Operation  
                     
Page  
Item  
Settings  
Default  
USER Description  
menu  
File  
MTX LINEAR MATRIX  
OFF/ON  
ON  
Turns the linear matrix correction and A P Sc R St  
user set matrix correction functions  
on or off.  
MATRIX (USER)  
OFF  
ON  
0
Turns the user-set matrix correction  
function on or off.  
MATRIX (PRESET)  
MATRIX R-G  
MATRIX R-B  
MATRIX G-R  
MATRIX G-B  
MATRIX B-R  
MATRIX B-G  
MATRIX  
Turns the preset matrix correction  
function on or off.  
(–99 to 99)  
Sets the arbitrary R-G user-set matrix  
coefficients.  
Sets the arbitrary R-B user-set matrix  
coefficients.  
Sets the arbitrary G-R user-set matrix  
coefficients.  
Sets the arbitrary G-B user-set matrix  
coefficients.  
Sets the arbitrary B-R user-set matrix  
coefficients.  
Sets the arbitrary B-G user-set matrix  
coefficients.  
MTX MULTI  
OFF/ON  
ON  
Turns the linear matrix correction and A P Sc R St  
multi matrix correction functions on or  
off.  
MATRIX (MULTI)  
OFF  
OFF  
Turns the multi matrix correction  
function on or off.  
MATRIX AREA IND OFF/ON  
Turns the zebra indication on or off in St  
the area corresponding to the  
currently selected setting.  
MATRIX COLOR  
DET  
Moves to color EXEC  
detection  
page.  
Detects color.  
MTX (MULTI) AXIS  
B/B+/MG–/  
MG/MG+/R/  
R+/YL–/YL/  
YL+/G–/G/G+/  
CY/CY+/B–  
B
Sets the region in which the multi  
matrix correction function can be  
changed.  
P St  
MTX (MULTI) HUE  
MTX (MULTI) SAT  
(–99 to 99)  
0
Adjusts the color phase affected by  
the multi matrix correction function in  
every sixteen axis mode.  
A P Sc R St  
Adjusts the saturation level affected  
by the multi matrix correction function  
in every sixteen-axis mode.  
V
V MOD  
OFF/ON  
ON  
0
Turns the V modulation function on or A P St  
off.  
MODULATION  
MASTER VMOD  
R VMOD  
(–99 to 99)  
Turns the master V modulation  
function on or off.  
A P Sc R St  
Turns the R V modulation function on  
or off.  
G VMOD  
Turns the G V modulation function on  
or off.  
B VMOD  
Turns the B V modulation function on  
or off.  
83  
Menu Organization and Operation  
     
Page  
Item  
Settings  
OFF/ON  
Default  
OFF  
0
USER Description  
menu  
File  
LOW KEY  
SAT  
LOW KEY SAT  
L.KEY SAT LEVEL  
Turns the low key saturation function A P Sc R St  
on or off.  
(–99 to 99)  
Sets the saturation level of the low  
luminance part.  
L.KEY SAT RANGE LOW/L.MID/  
H.MID/HIGH  
HIGH  
Sets the luminance level at which the  
low key saturation function becomes  
effective.  
Y BLACK GAMMA  
OFF/ON  
OFF  
0
Turns the Y black gamma function on  
or off.  
Y BLK GAM LEVEL (–99 to 99)  
Sets the gamma curve in the low  
luminance part.  
Y BLK GAM RANGE LOW/L.MID/  
H.MID/HIGH  
HIGH  
Sets the luminance level at which the  
Y black gamma becomes effective.  
SCENE FILE s1  
STAN-  
DARD  
Page3 Recalls the scene file saved in the  
memory of the camcorder.  
s2  
s3  
s4  
s5  
sSTANDARD  
Clears all current detail-adjusted  
settings and switch settings and  
returns the settings to the standard  
settings saved in the reference file.  
SCENE RECALL  
SCENE STORE  
F.ID  
Displays the  
SCENE FILE  
selection  
EXEC  
EXEC  
Blank  
Recalls the scene file from the  
memory of the camcorder or the  
“Memory Stick”.  
screen.  
Displays the  
SCENE FILE  
selection  
Stores the scene file in the memory of  
the camcorder or the “Memory Stick”.  
screen.  
Displays  
Sets the File ID.  
Sc  
character input  
mode (up to 16  
characters).  
The MAINTENANCE menu  
Page  
Item  
Settings  
Default  
USER Description  
menu  
File  
WHITE  
SHADING  
WHT SHAD CH SEL R/G/B  
R/G/B WHT H SAW (–99 to 99)  
R/G/B WHT H PARA  
R
0
Selects the channel adjusted by this A P  
menu.  
Compensates horizontal Saw white  
shading.  
P
Compensates horizontal Parabola  
white shading.  
R/G/B WHT V SAW  
Compensates vertical Saw white  
shading.  
R/G/B WHT V PARA  
Compensates vertical Parabola white  
shading.  
OFF/ON  
ON  
WHITE SAW/PARA  
Turns white shading Saw and  
P St  
Parabola compensation on and off.  
84  
Menu Organization and Operation  
                       
Page  
Item  
Settings  
Default  
USER Description  
menu  
File  
BLACK  
SHADING  
BLK SHAD CH SEL R/G/B  
R
0
Selects the channel adjusted by this A P  
menu.  
R/G/B BLK H SAW  
(–99 to 99)  
Compensates horizontal Saw black  
shading.  
P
R/G/B BLK H PARA  
R/G/B BLK V SAW  
Compensates horizontal Parabola  
black shading.  
Compensates vertical Saw black  
shading.  
R/G/B BLK V PARA  
Compensates vertical Parabola black  
shading.  
BLACK SAW/PARA OFF/ON  
ON  
0
Turns black shading Saw and  
Parabola compensation on and off.  
St  
MASTER BLACK  
(–99 to 99)  
Adjusts the master black level.  
A P Sc R St  
MASTER GAIN  
(TMP)  
–3dB/0dB/3dB/ Depends  
6dB/9dB/12dB/ on the  
Temporarily adjusts the master gain  
value.  
18dB/24dB/  
30dB/36dB  
switch.  
BATTERY  
<Sony Info>  
BEFORE END 1  
5 to 100%  
(in 5% steps)  
5%  
0%  
When a BP-GL65/GL95 Battery Pack A P  
is used, sets the voltage warning level  
just before the battery ends.  
END 1  
0 to 5%  
(in 1% steps)  
When a BP-GL65/GL95 Battery Pack  
is used, sets the voltage level at  
which the battery ends and the  
camcorder stops operation, just  
before the battery ends.  
<Sony>  
BEFORE END 2  
11.5 to 17.0V  
(in 0.1V steps)  
11.5V  
-–  
When a BP-L60S Battery Pack is  
used, sets the voltage warning level  
just before the battery ends.  
A P  
END 2  
11.0 to 11.5 V 11.0V  
(in 0.1V steps)  
When a BP-L60S Battery Pack is  
used, sets the voltage level at which  
the battery ends and the camcorder  
stops operation, just before the  
battery ends.  
<Others, EXT DC>  
BEFORE END 3  
11.5 to 17.0V  
(in 0.1V steps)  
11.8V  
When a battery pack other than a BP- A P  
GL65/GL95/L60S or an external  
power connected to the DC IN  
connector is used, sets the voltage  
warning level just before the battery  
ends.  
END3  
11.0 to 14.0 V 11.0V  
(in 0.1V steps)  
When a battery pack other than a BP-  
GL65/GL95/L60S or an external  
power connected to the DC IN  
connector is used, sets the voltage  
level at which the battery ends and  
the camcorder stops operation, just  
before the battery ends.  
85  
Menu Organization and Operation  
   
Page  
Item  
Settings  
Default  
USER Description  
menu  
File  
AUDIO  
AU MODE  
FS32K/FS48K FS48K  
NTSC: –12dB/ NTSC:  
Page4 Sets the audio recording level.  
A P  
AU HEADROOM  
Sets the audio reference level.  
–20dB  
PAL: –12dB/  
–18dB  
–20dB  
PAL:  
–18dB  
AU FADE  
OFF/ON  
OFF  
Turns the audio fade-in and fade-out  
functions on or off.  
AU SG (1KHz)  
OFF/ON  
OFF  
Sets whether to output a 1 kHz test  
tone during the Color Bar mode or  
not.  
F AUDIO VOL  
ENABL/DSABL ENABL  
Sets the validity of the AUDIO LEVEL  
knob on the front of the camcorder  
(page 10). (When setting to ENABL,  
the level of CH-1 is set to the value of  
AUDIO LEVEL knob on the front of  
the camcorder multiplied by the  
AUDIO LEVEL (CH-1/CH-2) control  
on the side of the camcorder.)  
VTR MODE  
REC TALLY BLINK  
STBY OFF TIMER  
OFF/ON  
ON  
Turns the tally illumination control on A P  
or off in the event of BATTERY  
BEFORE END/TAPE BEFORE END.  
1MIN/3MIN/  
5MIN  
1MIN  
Sets the time of standby-off interval (if  
there is no operation for a preset  
interval time while the recording is  
stopped, the camcorder goes to  
standby-off mode automatically).  
REC FORMAT  
SETUP ADD  
DVCAM/DV SP DVCAM Page4 Selects the type of video codec.  
OFF/ON  
ON  
PRESET  
WHT  
COLOR TEMP <P> Displays color 3200  
Page1 Sets the color temperature of preset A P R St  
white balance.  
temperature  
(Converted  
form R/B  
GAIN).  
COLOR FINE <P>  
(–99 to 99)  
0
Adjusts the value more precisely  
when the color temperature  
adjustment through COLOR TEMP  
<P> is not satisfactory.  
R GAIN <P>  
B GAIN <P>  
D5600K <P>  
Sets R gain of preset white balance.  
Sets B gain of preset white balance.  
OFF/ON  
OFF  
DCC  
Selects whether to electrically apply  
5600K filter to preset white balance.  
A St  
AWB ENABLE <P>  
Turns on and off the function which  
automatically acquires the preset  
white balance.  
DCC ADJUST DCC FUNCTION  
SEL  
DCC/ADP.K/  
FIX  
Selects the function assigned to the  
DCC switch. ADP.K stands for  
Adaptive Knee and FIX stands for  
fixed value.  
A P Sc  
A P  
DCC D RANGE  
400% / 450% / 600%  
500% / 550% /  
600%  
Sets the dynamic range when the  
DCC switch is set to the ON position.  
DCC POINT  
(–99 to 99)  
0
Adjusts DCC minimum knee point.  
Adjusts gain to DCC detected value.  
Adjusts DCC reaction speed.  
DCC GAIN  
DCC DELAY TIME  
86  
Menu Organization and Operation  
             
Page  
Item  
Settings  
Default  
1
USER Description  
menu  
File  
AUTO IRIS 2 IRIS WINDOW  
1/2/3/4/5/VAR  
Selects the auto iris detection  
window. VAR is variable.  
A P R St  
IRIS WINDOW IND OFF/ON  
OFF  
Turns on and off the function which  
displays a frame marker for the auto  
iris detection window.  
IRIS LEVEL  
(–99 to 99)  
20 to 465  
0
Adjusts level of the auto iris target  
value.  
A P Sc R St  
IRIS APL RATIO  
IRIS VAR WIDTH  
Adjusts mix ratio of auto iris detection  
peak value and average value.  
245  
Adjusts width of detection frame  
when the auto iris detection window is  
set to VAR.  
A P  
IRIS VAR HEIGHT  
IRIS VAR H POS  
IRIS VAR V POS  
NTSC: 20 to  
120  
PAL: 20 to 142 PAL: 85  
NTSC:  
72  
Adjusts height of detection frame  
when the auto iris detection window is  
set to VAR.  
–452 to 452  
0
Adjusts horizontal position of  
detection frame when the auto iris  
detection window is set to VAR.  
NTSC: –101 to  
100  
PAL: –122 to  
122  
0
Adjusts vertical position of detection  
frame when the auto iris detection  
window is set to VAR.  
IRIS SPEED  
(–99 to 99)  
OFF/ON  
0
Adjusts auto iris speed.  
A P Sc R St  
A P  
CLIP HIGH LIGHT  
OFF  
Turns on and off the function which,  
during auto iris adjustment, ignores  
very bright areas by dulling the  
reaction to high luminescence.  
FUNCTION 3 WHT FILTER INH  
COLOR BAR SEL  
OFF/ON  
OFF  
Turns on and off the function which  
inhibits independent white memory  
for each filter position.  
A P  
SMPTE/EBU/ NTSC:  
SNG  
Selects color bar type.  
SMPTE  
PAL:  
EBU  
REC TALLY  
UPPER/BOTH UPPER  
Selects whether to light the upper  
tally indicator only, or both upper and  
lower tally indicators.  
USER & ALL ONLY OFF/ON  
OFF  
Sets to show only USER menu in the  
TOP menu.  
RM COMMON  
MEMORY  
Selects whether or not to share  
settings for when a remote control  
unit is connected and when the  
camcorder is used alone.  
RM REC START  
i.LINK CTL  
RM/CAM/  
PARA  
RM  
When a remote control unit is  
connected, selects which REC  
buttons are enabled (Remote control  
only, the camcorder only, or both).  
ALL, REC/P,  
OFF  
REC/P  
OFF  
Sets the control command output  
from the i.LINK DV OUT connector.  
See “Settings required for an i.LINK  
connection” on page 41.  
i.LINK CTL(END)  
OFF/ON  
Selects whether or not to stop the  
tape on the external equipment via  
the i.LINK cable when the battery of  
the camcorder is exhausted.  
87  
Menu Organization and Operation  
     
Page  
Item  
Settings  
Default  
USER Description  
menu  
File  
GENLOCK  
GENLOCK  
OFF/ON  
ON  
0
Turns genlock on and off.  
A P  
GL H PHASE  
GL SC PHASE  
GL SC 0/180 SEL  
(–99 to 99)  
Page5 Sets genlock horizontal phase.  
Sets genlock subcarrier phase.  
0/180  
180  
ND COMP  
ND OFFSET  
ADJUST  
OFF/ON  
OFF  
Turns on and off the mode which sets  
ND (neutral density) filter color  
compensation values.  
CLEAR ND OFFSET After asking  
EXEC  
EXEC  
Clears ND filter color compensation  
values.  
YES/NO,  
executes the  
function.  
AUTO  
SHADING  
AUTO BLK  
SHADING  
Execute the auto black shading  
function.  
RESET BLK SHD  
After asking  
YES/NO,  
Clears black shading compensation  
values.  
executes the  
function.  
MASTER GAIN  
(TEMP)  
–3dB/0dB/3dB/ Depends  
6dB/9dB/12dB/ on  
Temporarily sets the master gain  
value.  
P Sc R St  
18dB/24dB/  
30dB/36dB  
switch.  
The FILE menu  
Page  
Item  
Settings  
Default  
USER Description  
menu  
File  
USER FILE  
USER FILE LOAD  
USER FILE SAVE  
Displays the  
USER FILE  
selection  
EXEC  
screen.  
F. ID  
Displays  
character input  
mode (up to 16  
character).  
USER PRESET  
After asking  
YES/NO,  
executes the  
function.  
EXEC  
EXEC  
USER FILE 2 STORE USR  
PRESET  
After asking  
YES/NO,  
Sets the pages registered in the  
USER menu to the standard setting.  
executes the  
function.  
CLEAR USR  
PRESET  
Clears the standard setting of pages  
registered in the USER menu.  
CUSTOMIZE  
RESET  
Returns the pages registered in the  
USER menu to the factory default  
state.  
LOAD CUSTOM  
DATA  
OFF/ON  
OFF  
Selects whether to include pages  
registered by the user in user files to  
be loaded by USER FILE LOAD.  
A P  
LOAD OUT OF  
USER  
Selects whether to include pages not  
registered by the user in user files  
loaded by USER FILE LOAD.  
BEFORE FILE  
PAGE  
Selects whether to include data after  
USER FILE pages in user files to be  
loaded by USER FILE LOAD.  
USER LOAD WHITE  
Selects whether to include white  
balance data in user files to be  
loaded by USER FILE LOAD.  
88  
Menu Organization and Operation  
                   
Page  
Item  
Settings  
Default  
USER Description  
menu  
File  
ALL FILE  
ALL FILE LOAD  
ALL FILE SAVE  
Displays the  
FILE selection  
screen.  
EXEC  
Loads ALL file.  
Saves ALL file.  
F.ID  
Displays  
Blank  
EXEC  
Names ALL file.  
A
character input  
mode (up to 16  
character).  
ALL PRESET  
After asking  
YES/NO,  
Returns items in ALL file to preset  
values.  
executes the  
function.  
STORE ALL  
PRESET  
Sets preset values of items in ALL  
file.  
CLEAR ALL  
PRESET  
Clears preset values of items in ALL  
file.  
SCENE FILE s1  
STAN-  
DARD  
s2  
s3  
s4  
s5  
sSTANDARD  
SCENE RECALL  
SCENE STORE  
Displays the  
SCENE FILE  
selection  
EXEC  
screen.  
F.ID  
Displays  
Blank  
EXEC  
Sc  
character input  
mode (up to 16  
characters).  
REFERENCE REFERENCE  
STORE  
After asking  
YES/NO,  
Saves reference file in internal  
memory.  
executes the  
function.  
REFERENCE  
CLEAR  
Clears reference file.  
REFERENCE LOAD  
REFERENCE SAVE  
Loads reference file.  
Saves reference file to “Memory  
Stick”.  
F. ID  
Displays  
Blank  
OFF  
Names reference file.  
R
character input  
mode (up to 16  
characters).  
SCENE WHITE  
DATA  
OFF/ON  
114.  
A P  
89  
Menu Organization and Operation  
     
Page  
Item  
Settings  
Default  
USER Description  
menu  
File  
LENS FILE 1 LENS FILE RECALL Displays the  
EXEC  
Loads lens file.  
Saves lens file.  
FILE selection  
LENS FILE STORE  
screen.  
F. ID  
Displays  
Blank  
EXEC  
Names lens file.  
L
character input  
mode (up to 16  
characters).  
LENS NO OFFSET After asking  
Clears lens file.  
YES/NO,  
executes the  
function.  
SOURCE  
MEMORY  
1
Displays number of selected lens file.  
IRIS GAIN  
(–99 to 99)  
(–99 to 99)  
0
0
0
Adjusts iris gain value of lens file.  
Sets lens file V SAW shading.  
L
L
LENS FILE 2 LENS M VMOD*  
LENS CENTER H* –48 to 47  
Compensates horizontal position of  
lens file center marker.  
LENS CENTER V*  
–15 to 14  
0
0
Compensates vertical position of lens  
file center marker.  
LENS R FLARE*  
LENS G FLARE*  
LENS B FLARE*  
LENS W-R OFST*  
(–99 to 99)  
Adjusts lens file flare (R).  
Adjusts lens file flare (G).  
Adjusts lens file flare (B).  
Compensates R value when extender  
and shrinker used.  
LENS W-B OFST*  
LENS FILE 3 SHADING CH SEL  
LENS R/G/B H  
Compensates B value when extender  
and shrinker used.  
R/G/B  
R
0
Selects the channel adjusted by this A P  
menu.  
(–99 to 99)  
Compensates horizontal Saw white  
shading.  
L
SAW  
LENS R/G/B H  
PARA  
*
Compensates horizontal Parabola  
white shading.  
*
LENS R/G/B V SAW  
*
Compensates vertical Saw white  
shading.  
LENS R/G/B V  
PARA*  
Compensates vertical Parabola white  
shading.  
MEMORY  
STICK  
M.S. FORMAT  
After asking  
YES/NO,  
executes the  
function.  
EXEC  
OFF  
Format “Memory Stick”.  
M.S. IN > JUMP TO OFF/USER/  
ALL/SCENE/  
LENS/REFER/  
USER1  
* “EX” is displayed when the extender is on, and “0.8” is displayed when  
the shrinker is on.  
90  
Menu Organization and Operation  
       
The DIAGNOSIS menu  
Page  
Item  
Settings  
Default  
USER Description  
menu  
File  
HOURS  
METER  
RESET METER  
Displays the  
RESET  
METER  
EXEC  
Displays the RESET METER  
selection screen.  
selection  
screen.  
DRUM RUNNING  
TAPE RUNNING  
OPERATION  
000000H to  
999999H  
Display only.  
THREADING  
000000 to  
999999  
DRUM RUNNING–2 000000H to  
999999H  
TAPE RUNNING–2  
OPERATION–2  
THREADING–2  
000000 to  
999999  
TIME/DATE  
CLOCK ADJUST  
Displays the  
TIME  
EXEC  
8
ADJUST  
selection  
screen.  
HOUR  
MIN  
00 to 23  
00 to 59  
Internal  
clock  
SEC  
YEAR  
MONTH  
DAY  
00 to 99  
01 to 12  
01 to 31  
DEV STATUS I/O  
1
Display only.  
FP1  
OK/NG  
FP2  
CN  
FRAM  
AT  
OK/NG  
EEPROM  
DCP1  
DCP2  
PA  
OK/NG  
LSI  
PX  
OK/NG  
BCS  
SCI  
SY  
OK/NG  
--/OK/NG  
RM  
91  
Menu Organization and Operation  
                       
Page  
Item  
Settings  
Default  
USER Description  
menu  
File  
DEV STATUS AUTO CHECK  
2
After asking  
YES/NO,  
executes the  
function.  
EXEC  
HUMID TIMER  
RESET  
Resets the humid alarm.  
OPTION  
BOARD  
SDI OUTPUT  
Displays status of installed option  
board.  
COMPOSITE  
VIDEO INPUT  
92  
Menu Organization and Operation  
   
Displaying menus  
Basic menu operations  
By pressing and turning the MENU knob, you can set  
various menu items. In the remainder of this section, the  
viewfinder screen is generally shown as an example of the  
menu display, but a similar display also appears on the  
LCD monitor.  
Viewfinder  
LCD monitor  
To select the setting items and values on  
the menu  
Turn the MENU knob to select in the cases explained  
below.  
MENU switch  
POWER switch  
MENU knob  
To scroll pages  
When the camcorder is powered on, flick the MENU  
switch to the ON position to display the menu on the  
viewfinder screen and the LCD monitor of the camcorder.  
If this is the first time the menu has been used after the  
camcorder has been powered on, the USER menu is  
displayed. If the menu has been used before, the last  
accessed page appears.  
TOP  
? 02 MONITOR OUT  
MONI OUT VFDISP :  
? 01 OUTPUT  
TOP  
ON  
ON  
ON  
OFF  
OFF  
LCD BRIGHT<L>  
LCD BRIGHT<H>  
LCD COLOR  
:
:
:
0
0
0
MONI OUT MENU  
MONI OUT TC  
MONI OUT MARKER :  
MONI OUT ZEBRA  
:
:
:
When ? blinks, turn the MENU knob to  
switch pages.  
When the menu is not displayed on the LCD  
monitor  
Press the DISP SEL button on the lower left of the LCD  
monitor to select the CHAR display.  
To select a menu to set  
01 OUTPUT  
TOP  
01 OUTPUT  
TOP  
LCD BRIGHT<L>  
LCD BRIGHT<H>  
LCD COLOR  
:
:
:
0
0
0
LCD BRIGHT<L>  
LCD BRIGHT<H>  
LCD COLOR  
:
:
:
0
0
0
To end menu operations  
Flick the MENU switch to OFF.  
When the DISPLAY switch on the viewfinder is set to ON  
or the VF DISP item on the VF DISP 1 page is set to ON,  
the display indicating the current status of the camcorder  
appears on the viewfinder.  
When b appears, turn the MENU knob to move b up and down.  
To change a setting value  
01 OUTPUT  
TOP  
01 OUTPUT  
TOP  
LCD BRIGHT<L>  
LCD BRIGHT<H>  
LCD COLOR  
:?  
:
:
0
0
0
LCD BRIGHT<L>  
LCD BRIGHT<H>  
LCD COLOR  
:?  
:
:
1
0
0
To display the TOP menu  
If the menu is not displayed on the screen, press and hold  
the MENU knob and flick the MENU switch to the ON  
position.  
When ? blinks, turn the MENU knob to change the  
setting (ON/OFF, value, etc.).  
93  
Menu Organization and Operation  
           
To confirm the setting items and values on  
the menu  
Each time you press the MENU knob, the menu display  
switches in the following sequence.  
Using the USER menu (Example of  
the menu operation)  
This section explains menu operations using the USER  
menu as an example. The operations are the same for the  
ALL, OPERATION, PAINT, MAINTENANCE, FILE,  
and DIAGNOSIS menus. For details about how to operate  
the USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu, see “Editing the  
Also, if an optional extension boards has not been installed  
in your camcorder, some items are not displayed.  
Example: When using the OPERATION menu  
1
Flick the MENU switch to ON.  
CONTENTS page  
TOP menu  
The USER menu normally appears.  
?U00 CONTENTS  
TOP  
<TOP MENU>  
01.USER1  
02.USER2  
03.USER3  
04.USER4  
05.USER5  
06.USER6  
07.USER7  
08.USER8  
USER  
USER MENU CUSTOMIZE  
ALL  
OPERATION  
PAINT  
MAINTENANCE  
FILE  
DIAGNOSIS  
?U01 USER  
TOP  
If the menu has  
not been used  
If the menu has been  
used before  
Menu selection page  
Menu selection mode  
U00 CONTENTS  
TOP  
? 01 OUTPUT  
TOP  
01.USER1  
02.USER2  
03.USER3  
04.USER4  
05.USER5  
06.USER6  
07.USER7  
08.USER8  
LCD BRIGHT<L>  
LCD BRIGHT<H>  
LCD COLOR  
:
:
:
0
0
0
If it does not, turn the MENU knob to move b to  
USER in the TOP menu, and press the MENU knob.  
If the USER menu has been used before, the last  
accessed page appears. In this case, go to step 2.  
If this is the first time the USER menu has been  
displayed, the CONTENTS page of the USER menu  
appears. In this case, follow the procedure below.  
Setting item selection mode  
01 OUTPUT  
TOP  
LCD BRIGHT<L>  
LCD BRIGHT<H>  
LCD COLOR  
:
:
:
0
0
0
1 Press the MENU knob. Then turn the MENU knob  
to move b to the desired page number.  
This indicates that  
the menu screen can  
U00 CONTENTS  
TOP  
be scrolled.  
Setting value adjustment mode  
01.USER1  
02.USER2  
03.USER3  
04.USER4  
05.USER5  
06.USER6  
07.USER7  
08.USER8  
01 OUTPUT  
TOP  
b
LCD BRIGHT<L>  
LCD BRIGHT<H>  
LCD COLOR  
:?  
:
:
0
0
0
2 Press the MENU knob again.  
Note  
The page selected in 1 is displayed. Go to step 3.  
If the TOP menu has not been displayed since the  
camcorder is turned on, TOP does not appear on the upper  
right in the above screens, and you cannot go to the TOP  
menu. In this case, follow the procedure in “To display the  
When you set items on the ALL, OPERATION,  
PAINT, MAINTENANCE, FILE, or DIAGNOSIS  
menu, move b to the menu that contains the desired  
item in the TOP menu, and then press the MENU  
knob.  
To display the TOP menu when another menu is  
displayed  
Move b to TOP displayed at the top right of each page of  
the menu, and press the MENU knob. Or flick the MENU  
switch repeatedly to CANCEL until the TOP menu is  
displayed.  
94  
Menu Organization and Operation  
   
2
3
Turn the MENU knob until the desired page appears.  
To cancel setting  
Before pressing the MENU knob in step 6 of the above  
procedure, flick the MENU switch to CANCEL.  
?U01 USER 1  
TOP  
IRIS OVERRIDE  
DETAIL LEVEL  
MASTER BLACK  
BLACK GAMMA  
MASTER BLK GAMMA:  
COLOR TEMP <P>  
:
:
:
:
OFF  
0
0
OFF  
0
3200  
To return to the standard settings  
By pressing and holding the MENU knob in step 5 of the  
above procedure, the settings return to the standard.  
:
Press the MENU knob.  
To move to another page  
b and z appear.  
Page number  
?U01 USER 1  
TOP  
U01 USER 1  
TOP  
IRIS OVERRIDE  
DETAIL LEVEL  
MASTER BLACK  
BLACK GAMMA  
MASTER BLK GAMMA:  
COLOR TEMP <P>  
:
:
:
:
OFF  
0
0
OFF  
0
3200  
IRIS OVERRIDE  
DETAIL LEVEL  
MASTER BLACK  
BLACK GAMMA  
MASTER BLK GAMMA:  
COLOR TEMP <P>  
:
:
:
:
OFF  
0
0
OFF  
0
3200  
:
:
When ? appears in front of the page number  
Turn the MENU knob to switch pages.  
4
5
Turn the MENU knob to move b to the desired item,  
and then press the MENU knob.  
When nothing appears in front of the page  
number  
Turn the MENU knob to move b to the page number, and  
press the MENU knob. Then Turn the MENU knob to  
switch pages.  
b changes to z, and z changes to ?.  
Turn the MENU knob to change the setting.  
Depending on the direction of turning the knob, the  
setting value increases, decreases, switches between  
ON and OFF, etc.  
Editing the USER menu  
If you want to cancel a change or return to the standard  
settings, see the next item “To cancel setting” and “To  
The USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu allows you to  
configure a USER menu that consists only of pages and  
items that you need by adding, deleting or replacing the  
pages.  
To interrupt changing the settings  
Flick the MENU switch to OFF.  
By flicking the MENU switch to ON again, the values  
that were displayed when you interrupted the setting  
operations will reappear so you can continue making  
settings.  
To add a new page  
The USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu allows you to add  
a new page to the USER menu.  
While the EDIT page contains factory-preset items, the  
USER 9 EDIT to USER 19 EDIT pages are all blank in  
their initial state. You can register up to 10 items, including  
blank lines, on each of these pages.  
6
Press the MENU knob.  
z changes to b, and ? changes to z. The selection is  
set.  
1
2
Display the TOP menu (page 93).  
7
8
To continue setting other items on the same page,  
repeat steps from 4 to 6.  
Turn the MENU knob to move b to USER MENU  
CUSTOMIZE, then press the MENU knob.  
To end the menu operation, flick the MENU switch to  
OFF.  
If this is the first time the USER MENU CUSTOMIZE  
menu has been displayed, the CONTENTS page of the  
menu appears.  
The menu disappears from the screen, and the display  
indicating the current status of the camcorder appears  
along the top and bottom of the screen.  
95  
Menu Organization and Operation  
                 
7
Repeat steps 4 to 6 to add the remaining items.  
?E00 CONTENTS  
TOP  
01.EDIT PAGE  
02.USER 1  
03.USER 2  
04.USER 3  
05.USER 4  
06.USER 5  
07.USER 6  
08.USER 7  
09.USER 8  
10.USER 9  
You can add up to 10 items on one page.  
EDIT  
EDIT  
EDIT  
EDIT  
EDIT  
EDIT  
EDIT  
EDIT  
EDIT  
To delete items from a page by using the MENU  
knob  
1
2
Follow steps 1 to 3 of “To add a new page” on page  
95.  
If the USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu has been  
used before, the last accessed page appears.  
Press the MENU knob. Then turn the MENU knob to  
move b to the item that you wan to delete, and press  
and hold the MENU knob again.  
3
If the CONTENTS page is displayed, press the MENU  
knob. Then turn the MENU knob to move b to one of  
USER 1 EDIT to USER 19 EDIT, and press the  
MENU knob again.  
The item is deleted.  
To delete items from a page by using the EDIT  
FUNCTION page  
If a different page is displayed, turn the MENU knob  
until the desired page appears, then press the MENU  
knob.  
1
2
Follow steps 1 to 3 of “To add a new page” on page  
95.  
Example: When selecting the USER 9 EDIT page  
Press the MENU knob. Then turn the MENU knob to  
move b to the item that you want to delete, and press  
the MENU knob again.  
E10 USER 9 EDIT  
TOP  
The EDIT FUNCTION page appears.  
3
Turn the MENU knob to move b to DELETE, and  
press the MENU knob.  
4
Press the MENU knob. Then turn the MENU knob to  
move b to the line where you want to add an item, and  
press the MENU knob again.  
The previously displayed page appears again, and the  
message “DELETE OK? Yes b No” appears at the  
upper right.  
The EDIT FUNCTION page appears.  
4
To delete, turn the MENU knob to move b to YES,  
and then press the MENU knob.  
EDIT FUNCTION  
INSERT  
MOVE  
ESC  
To replace items on a page  
DELETE  
BLANK  
1
2
Follow steps 1 to 3 of “To add a new page” on page  
95.  
Press the MENU knob. Then turn the MENU knob to  
move b to the item that you want to replace, and press  
the MENU knob again.  
5
6
Press the MENU knob. Then turn the MENU knob to  
move b to INSERT, and press the MENU knob again.  
The EDIT FUNCTION page appears.  
The page for the last added item appears.  
Add the items as below.  
3
4
Turn the MENU knob to move b to MOVE, then press  
the MENU knob.  
1 Turn the MENU knob until the page that has the  
The previously displayed page appears again.  
desired items appears, then press the MENU knob.  
Turn the MENU knob to move b to the position where  
you want to move the item, then press the MENU  
knob.  
2 Turn the MENU knob to move b to the desired  
item, then press the MENU knob.  
The USER 2 EDIT page appears again, displaying the  
newly added item.  
The item selected in step 2 moves to the position that  
you selected in step 4.  
96  
Menu Organization and Operation  
To insert a blank line  
The EDIT FUNCTION page appears.  
1
2
Follow steps 1 to 3 of “To add a new page” on page  
95.  
5
6
Turn the MENU knob to move b to INSERT, and  
press the MENU knob again.  
The CONTENTS page appears.  
Press the MENU knob. Then turn the MENU knob to  
move b to the item above which you want to insert a  
blank line.  
Turn the MENU knob to move b to the desired page,  
then press the MENU knob again.  
The EDIT FUNCTION page appears.  
The number and name of the page selected in step 6 is  
added above the item selected in step 4.  
3
Turn the MENU knob to move b to BLANK, and  
press the MENU knob.  
To cancel adding a page  
Before pressing the MENU knob in step 6, turn the  
MENU knob to move b to ESC at the top right of the  
screen, then press the MENU knob.  
The previously displayed page appears again, and a  
blank line is inserted above the specified item.  
The EDIT PAGE screen appears again.  
Note  
To delete a page by using the MENU knob  
You cannot insert a blank line on a page where 10 items  
have already been registered.  
1
2
Follow steps 1 to 3 of “To add a page”.  
To add/delete/replace pages  
Press the MENU knob. Then turn the MENU knob to  
move b to the page that you want to delete, and press  
and hold the MENU knob.  
You can add a new page to the USER menu, delete a page  
from the USER menu, or replace pages, using the EDIT  
PAGE of the USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu.  
To delete a page by using the EDIT FUNCTION  
page  
To add a page  
1
2
Follow steps 1 to 3 of “To add a page”.  
1
2
Display the TOP menu (page 93).  
Press the MENU knob. Then turn the MENU knob to  
move b to the page that you want to delete, and press  
the MENU knob again.  
Turn the MENU knob to move b to USER MENU  
CUSTOMIZE, then press the MENU knob.  
If this is the first time the USER MENU CUSTOMIZE  
menu has been displayed, the CONTENTS page  
appears. If the menu has been used before, the last  
accessed page appears.  
The EDIT FUNCTION page appears.  
3
Turn the MENU knob to move b to DELETE, and  
press the MENU knob.  
3
If the CONTENTS page is displayed, press the MENU  
knob. Then turn the MENU knob to move b to EDIT  
PAGE, and press the MENU knob again.  
The previously displayed page appears again, and the  
message “DELETE OK? YES b NO” appears at the  
upper right.  
If a different page is displayed, turn the MENU knob  
until the EDIT PAGE screen appears.  
4
Turn the menu knob to move b to YES, and press the  
MENU knob.  
The EDIT PAGE appears.  
To replace a page  
?E01 EDIT PAGE  
TOP  
1
2
Follow steps 1 to 3 of “To add a page”.  
01.USER 1  
02.USER 2  
03.USER 3  
04.USER 4  
05.USER 5  
06.USER 6  
07.USER 7  
08.USER 8  
END OF PAGE  
Press the MENU knob. Then turn the MENU knob to  
move b to the page that you want to move, and press  
the MENU knob again.  
The EDIT FUNCTION page appears.  
4
Press the MENU knob. Then turn the MENU knob to  
move b to where you want to add the page, then press  
the MENU knob again.  
3
Turn the MENU knob to move b to MOVE, then press  
the MENU knob.  
97  
Menu Organization and Operation  
   
The previous screen appears again.  
Setting the Status Display  
on the Viewfinder Screen  
and the LCD Monitor  
4
Turn the MENU knob to move b to the position to  
where you want to move the page selected in step 2,  
and press the MENU knob.  
The page selected in step 2 is moved to the position  
selected in step 4.  
This section explains the menu settings for the display of  
the viewfinder screen. These settings are also used for the  
display of the LCD monitor in the same way.  
Resetting USER menu settings to  
the standard settings  
You can return all settings in the USER menu to the  
standard settings.  
Selecting the display items  
To select the items to be displayed on the viewfinder  
screen and the LCD monitor from the VF DISP 1 and VF  
DISP 2 pages of the OPERATION menu, turn on or off the  
indication next to each item.  
1
Display the USER FILE page of the FILE menu.  
For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu  
1
Display the VF DISP 1 or VF DISP 2 page of the  
OPERATION menu.  
?F01 USER FILE  
TOP  
USER FILE LOAD  
USER FILE SAVE  
:
:
EXEC  
EXEC  
For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu  
F.ID : sssssssssssssssss  
USER PRESET  
:
EXEC  
You can select the following items to be displayed on  
the screen on the VF DISP 1 and VF DISP 2 pages.  
2
Press the MENU knob. Then turn the MENU knob to  
move b to USER PRESET, and press the MENU knob  
again.  
VF DISP 1 page  
Item  
Description  
VF DISP  
Turns on or off the viewfinder  
The message “PRESET OK? YES b NO” appears.  
1)  
screen.  
2)  
VF DISP MODE  
Selects the display mode.  
F01 USER FILE  
PRESET OK?  
USER FILE LOAD  
USER FILE SAVE  
YES NO  
EXEC  
EXEC  
DISP EXTENDER Displays extender.  
:
:
DISP FILTER  
DISP WHITE  
Displays types of the ND filter.  
F.ID : sssssssssssssssss  
USER PRESET EXEC  
Displays selected white balance  
memory.  
:
DISP GAIN  
Displays gain value.  
DISP SHUTTER  
Displays shutter speed and ECS  
mode.  
3
Turn the MENU knob to move b to YES, and press the  
MENU knob.  
DISP AUDIO  
DISP TAPE  
DISP IRIS  
Displays audio level.  
The settings for all items in the USER menu are reset  
to the standard settings.  
Displays remaining tape capacity.  
Displays iris opening.  
1) The viewfinder screen can be also turned on or off by using the  
DISPLAY switch of the viewfinder.  
2) For detailed information on the display mode, see “Display modes  
98  
Setting the Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen and the LCD Monitor  
           
Setting change confirmation/adjustment progress  
messages and display modes  
VF DISP 2 page  
Y: Message is displayed.  
Item  
Description  
N: Message is not displayed.  
DISP COLOR  
TEMP  
Displays the color temperature.  
Message display  
condition  
Message  
Display  
mode  
setting  
DISP BATT  
Displays the battery voltage and  
remaining capacity of an internal  
battery pack or an external battery  
connected to the DC IN  
1)  
REMAIN  
1
2
3
connector.  
When the filter  
selection has been  
changed  
ND: n  
(where n = 1, 2, 3, 4)  
N
N
Y
DISP DC IN  
Displayed when the power is  
supplied from an external battery  
connected to the DC IN  
connector.  
When the gain setting GAIN: n  
has been changed  
N
N
Y
(where n = -3dB, 0dB,  
3dB, 6dB, 9dB,12dB,  
18dB, 24dB, 30dB,  
36dB)  
DISP 16:9/4:3 ID  
Displays the 16:9/4:3 mode  
indicator.  
DISP VTR STATUS Displays the VTR operating  
status.  
When the setting of  
WHITE: n  
N
N
N
N
N
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
Y
the WHITE BAL switch (where n = A CH, B  
DISP VTR  
TRIGGER  
Displays the REC TRIGGER  
switch setting.  
has been changed  
CH, PRESET) or  
ATW: RUN  
2)  
When the OUTPUT/  
DCC switches has  
been set to DCC ON  
or OFF  
DCC: ON (or OFF)  
DISP TIME CODE Displays the time code.  
DISP REC  
FORMAT  
Displays the recording format.  
1) When an Anton Bauer Intelligent Battery System or a BP-GL65/  
GL95/L60S battery pack is used, the setting of this item determines  
the display as follows.  
INT: The remaining battery capacity is shown as a percentage when  
there is a change, and when the capacity is low.  
AUTO: The remaining battery capacity is shown as a percentage,  
except that when this is impossible the battery voltage appears.  
VOLT: The battery voltage is shown.  
2) Displays only when an external VTR is connected to the (i.LINK)  
DV OUT connector.  
When the shutter  
speed and mode  
setting has been  
changed*  
: SS: 1/100 (or 1/125,  
1/250, 1/500, 1/1000,  
1/2000, ECS, SLS)  
When the black or  
white balance has  
been adjusted  
E.g. WHITE: OK  
* This is also displayed for about 3 seconds when the SHUTTER switch is  
set to ON.  
2
Select whether the item should appear in the  
viewfinder screen (the ON setting), or not appear (the  
OFF setting).  
To change the display mode  
1
Display the VF DISP 1 page of the OPERATION  
menu.  
Display modes and setting change  
confirmation/adjustment progress  
messages  
For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu  
2
Set VF DISP MODE to either 1, 2, or 3.  
The display mode setting changes.  
You can limit or suppress the messages that give details of  
setting changes and adjustment progress and results by  
setting a display mode.  
The conditions under which messages are displayed and  
their correspondence with the display mode are as follows.  
For details about the settings of 1 to 3, see the chart  
above.  
99  
Setting the Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen and the LCD Monitor  
     
Setting the marker display  
Setting the viewfinder  
You can switch the display of the center and safety zone  
markers on or off and select whether the area indicated by  
the safety zone marker is 80%, 90%, 92%, or 95% of the  
screen area.  
Use the VF SETTING page of the OPERATION menu to  
select items related to the viewfinder.  
1
Display the VF SETTING page of the OPERATION  
menu.  
1
Display the MARKER 1 page of the OPERATION  
menu.  
For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu  
For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu  
You can set the following items on the VF SETTING  
page.  
You can set the following items on the MARKER 1  
page.  
Item  
Description  
Item  
Description  
ZEBRA  
Turns the zebra display ON or  
OFF.  
1)  
MARKER  
Not to display all markers, set to  
OFF.  
ZEBRA SELECT  
Selects ZEBRA 1, ZEBRA 2 or  
BOTH.  
CENTER  
To display the center marker, set  
to ON.  
ZEBRA 1 DET LVL Adjusts the level of the zebra 1  
display (20% to 70%). (Factory  
setting is 70%.)  
SAFETY ZONE  
To display the safety zone, set to  
ON.  
ZEBRA 1 APT LVL Adjusts the aperture level of the  
zebra 1 display (1 to 10).  
SAFETY AREA  
Selects the safety zone range.  
ASPECT  
(DSR-450WS/  
450WSP only)  
To display the aspect marker, set  
to ON.  
ZEBRA 2 DET LVL Adjusts the level of the zebra 2  
display. (Factory setting is 100%.)  
VF DETAIL LEVEL Adjusts the sharpness of the  
ASPECT SELECT Selects the type of the aspect  
2)  
viewfinder (–99 to 0 to 99).  
Turns the VF detail function on or  
off and adjusts the level.  
(DSR-450WS/  
450WSP only)  
marker.  
ASPECT MASK  
(4:3)  
(DSR-450WS/  
450WSP only)  
To make the areas out of the  
selected aspect marker dimmer,  
set to ON.  
VF ASPECT  
(DSR-450WS/  
450WSP only)  
Selects the viewfinder aspect ratio  
(AUTO/16:9).  
3)  
ASPECT MASK  
LVL  
(DSR-450WS/  
450WSP only)  
Sets the mask level (1/2, 1/4 or 1/  
8), when the ASPECT MASK is  
set to ON.  
1) When you use the viewfinder which is not equipped with the ZEBRA  
switch, turns the display on or off using this item. When you use the  
viewfinder with the ZEBRA switch, the most recent operation of the  
ZEBRA switch and this menu operation is effective.  
2) The sharpness setting at the viewfinder does not affect the recorded  
image.  
3) When the VF ASPECT item is set to AUTO, this is linked to the  
setting of the 16:9/4:3 SELECT item on the FORMAT page.  
When the VF ASPECT item is set to 16:9, but 4:3 is selected on the  
FORMAT page, then it is not possible to mix the zebra display and  
marker display signals on the output signal from the MONITOR  
OUT connector.  
100% MARKER  
To display the effective pixel area,  
set to ON.  
Note  
The items above, except for ASPECT MASK (4:3),  
are not displayed on the LCD monitor.  
2
Perform the settings for each item.  
2
Perform the settings for each item.  
For details about the setting item, see the  
OPERATION menu list.  
100  
Setting the Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen and the LCD Monitor  
       
Recording shot data superimposed  
on the color bars  
Setting the shot ID  
On the SHOT ID page of the OPERATION menu, you can  
set a shot ID of up to 12 alphanumeric characters, spaces,  
and symbols. When the OUTPUT/DCC switch is set to  
BARS, DCC OFF, this shot ID is output with the color bar  
signal. The shot ID comprises ID-1 to ID-4, and you can  
select the shot ID to be recorded superimposed on the color  
bars on the SHOT DISP page.  
In the SHOT DISP page of the OPERATION menu, you  
can select which shot data is recorded superimposed on the  
color bars. You can also select which of the shot IDs (1 to  
4) set in the SHOT ID page is recorded superimposed on  
the picture.  
1
Display the SHOT DISP page of the OPERATION  
menu.  
Note  
When the menu is displayed, the shot ID is not displayed  
even if the color bar signal is output.  
For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu  
You can set the following items on the SHOT DISP  
page.  
1
Display the SHOT ID page of the OPERATION menu.  
For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu  
Item  
Description  
? 12 SHOT ID  
ID-1 :?  
ID-2 : ssssssssssss  
ID-3 : ssssssssssss  
ID-4 : ssssssssssss  
TOP  
SHOT DATE  
Selects whether or not the shot  
data is superimposed.  
x
SHOT TIME  
Selects whether or not shot time  
is superimposed.  
SHOT MODEL  
NAME  
Selects whether or not the model  
name is superimposed.  
SHOT SERIAL NO Selects whether or not the serial  
number is superimposed.  
2
Press the MENU knob. Then turn the MENU knob to  
move b to the ID (one of ID-1 to ID-4) you want to set,  
and press the MENU knob again.  
SHOT ID SEL  
Selects whether or not the shot ID  
set on the SHOT ID page is  
superimposed. To carry out  
superimposed recording, select  
the SHOT ID number (1 to 4).  
x appears over the first character position in the  
string, and characters can now be input.  
SHOT 16:9 ID  
Selects whether or not the 16:9  
mode indicator is superimposed  
(when selecting 16:9 aspect  
ratio).  
12 SHOT ID  
ID-1 :?  
TOP  
x
ID-2 : ssssssssssss  
ID-3 : ssssssssssss  
ID-4 : ssssssssssss  
SHOT BLINK  
CHARA  
Selects whether or not the  
blinking character is  
superimposed.  
i#$%&'()*+,-./012345678  
9:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP  
QRSTUVWXYZ[ ]abcdefghijk  
lmnopqrstuvwxyz~  
INS DEL RET  
ESC END  
2
Set each item to ON/OFF (whether or not to record the  
selected item superimposed).  
3
Enter or change the characters.  
When you are entering the shot ID for the first time, go  
to step 2.  
To carry out superimposed recording  
To actually record the items selected for superimposed  
recording on the SHOT DISP page, set the OUTPUT/DCC  
switch to BARS, DCC OFF. The items selected for  
superimposed recording appear on the screen and are  
recorded superimposed on the color bars.  
1 Turn the MENU knob to move x to the character  
which you want to change, then press the MENU  
knob.  
A character table appears.  
12 SHOT ID  
ID-1 :?  
TOP  
x
ID-2 : ssssssssssss  
ID-3 : ssssssssssss  
ID-4 : ssssssssssss  
i#$%&'()*+,-./012345678  
9:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP  
QRSTUVWXYZ[ ]abcdefghijk  
lmnopqrstuvwxyz~  
INS DEL RET  
ESC END  
101  
Setting the Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen and the LCD Monitor  
       
2 Turn the MENU knob until x moves to the  
character position that you want to select, then  
press the MENU knob.  
Displaying the status confirmation  
windows  
Example: When entering the letter “+”  
You can confirm the settings or status of the camcorder on  
the screen by displaying the following two windows.  
• CAMERA STATUS window  
12 SHOT ID  
TOP  
ID-1 :?  
ID-2 : ssssssssssss  
ID-3 : ssssssssssss  
ID-4 : ssssssssssss  
• VTR STATUS window  
i#$%&'()*+,-./012345678  
9:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP  
QRSTUVWXYZ[ ]abcdefghijk  
lmnopqrstuvwxyz~  
You can use the SET STATUS page of the OPERATION  
menu to set whether or not the status confirmation  
windows are displayed.  
ESC END  
4
5
Repeat step 3 for each of the remaining characters.  
Display content of the window  
When the input is complete, turn the MENU knob to  
move x over END, then press the MENU knob.  
CAMERA STATUS window  
This ends the input, and returns to the SHOT ID page.  
CAMERA STATUS  
FORMAT : I  
ASSIGN <1> ATW <2> OFF  
<3> OFF <4> OFF  
FRONT AUDIO VOL : ENABL  
To insert a space  
In step 3 above, move x over INS, and press the MENU  
knob. To cancel inserting a space, move x to RET, and  
press the MENU knob.  
ZEBRA: OFF SELECT:  
DET : 70% APT : 10%  
DET2: 100%  
- Actual State ---------  
REAR BNC :VBS  
1
12 SHOT ID  
TOP  
This window allows you to confirm the following items  
related to the camera setting.  
FORMAT: Camera scan mode (when recording), or  
tape format (when playing back)  
ID-1 : CM015  
ID-2 : ssssssssssss  
ID-3 : ssssssssssss  
ID-4 : ssssssssssss  
$%&'()*+,-./0123456789:  
;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQR  
STUVWXYZ[\]_  
- I: Interlace scan mode  
- P: Progressive scan mode  
Move x over INS.  
INS DEL RET  
ESC END  
- 24P 2.3: 24 frames per second, progressive scan mode  
(converted to 60i at 2-3 pulldown)  
12 SHOT ID  
TOP  
- 24P 2.3.3.2: 24 frame per second, progressive scan  
mode (converted to 60i at 2-3-3-2 pulldown)  
(”PB” is displayed behind the item during playback.)  
ASSIGN: The setting of ASSIGN switch (1 to 4)  
FRONT AUDIO VOL: The setting of the AUDIO  
LEVEL knob on the front of the camcorder  
ZEBRA: The setting of zebra  
ID-1 : CM 015  
ID-2 : ssssssssssss  
ID-3 : ssssssssssss  
ID-4 : ssssssssssss  
Space inserted.  
$%&'()*+,-./0123456789:  
;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQR  
STUVWXYZ[\]_  
IDEL RET  
ESC END  
Information displayed below “Actual State” appears only  
when a CBK-SD01 SDI Output Board is installed in the  
DSR-450WS/450WSP.  
REAR BNC: Output signal of the VIDEO OUT  
connector  
To delete a character  
over DEL, and press the MENU knob. This deletes the  
character under x in the shot ID row.  
To cancel deleting the character, move x over RET, and  
press the MENU knob.  
VTR STATUS window  
VTR STATUS  
16bit DF F.MIC:MONO  
To cancel changing shot ID  
Before executing step 5 of “Setting the shot ID” on page  
101, move b to ESC, then press the MENU knob.  
REC FORMAT  
AUDIO MODE  
DF/NDF  
INTERVAL REC  
REC TIME  
INTERVAL TIME  
: DVCAM  
: FS32K  
:
:
:
:
DF  
OFF  
0.5S  
30S  
VTR TRIGGER MODE : ----  
STANDBY OFF TIMER: 1MIN  
This window allows you to confirm the following items  
related to VTR.  
102  
Setting the Status Display on the Viewfinder Screen and the LCD Monitor  
     
REC FORMAT: Recording format  
AUDIO MODE: Audio bit rate  
DF/NDF (DSR-400/450WS only): Setting condition of  
DF/NDF  
INTERVAL REC: Condition of Interval Rec  
VTR TRIGGER MODE: Trigger mode  
STANDBY OFF TIMER: Standby-off timer setting  
Adjustments and  
Settings from Menus  
Setting gain values for the GAIN  
switch positions  
To display the status confirmation  
windows  
Flick the MENU switch to STATUS when the menu is not  
displayed.  
You can set the gains corresponding to the L, M, and H  
positions of the GAIN switch, which switches the gain of  
the video amplifier.  
1
Display the GAIN SW page of the OPERATION  
menu.  
For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu  
You can set the following items on the GAIN SW  
page.  
CANCEL STATUS  
Each time you flick the switch to  
STATUS, the window switches.  
After 10 seconds, the window  
Item  
Description  
GAIN LOW  
Sets the gain value corresponding  
to the L position of the GAIN  
switch.  
ON  
OFF  
disappears automatically.  
MENU  
GAIN MID  
Sets the gain value corresponding  
to the M position of the GAIN  
switch.  
To disable display of the status  
confirmation windows  
GAIN HIGH  
GAIN TURBO  
Sets the gain value corresponding  
to the H position of the GAIN  
switch.  
1
Display the SET STATUS page of the OPERATION  
menu.  
When assigning TURBO to the  
ASSIGN switch, sets the gain  
value corresponding to the  
ASSIGN switch (page 106).  
For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu  
TURBO SW IND  
OFF: When you operate the GAIN  
switch after pressing the ASSIGN  
switch that is assigned to TURBO,  
the gain value is changed  
according to the ASSIGN switch  
position.  
ON: When TURBO GAIN set by  
pressing the ASSIGN switch that  
is assigned to TURBO, the gain  
value is not changed even if you  
set the GAIN switch, until you  
press the ASSIGN switch once  
more.  
You can set the following items on the SET STATUS  
page.  
Item  
Description  
STATUS CAMERA Selects whether or not the  
CAMERA STATUS window is  
displayed.  
STATUS VTR  
Selects whether or not the VTR  
STATUS window is displayed.  
2
Perform the settings for each item.  
2
Perform the settings for each item corresponding to the  
switch position (GAIN LOW, GAIN MID, GAIN  
HIGH, and GAIN TURBO).  
Any of –3, 0, 3, 6, 9, 12, 18, 24, 30, or 36 dB can be set  
in any sequence.  
To change the gain corresponding to another switch  
position, repeat this step.  
103  
Adjustments and Settings from Menus  
           
Selecting the output signals  
(DSR-450WS/450WSP only)  
Setting the color temperature  
manually  
When the CBK-SD01 SDI Output Board is installed, you  
can select the type of video signals from the VIDEO OUT  
connector on the OUTPUT page. You can select either  
VBS or SDI.  
Please note that only the picture obtained during recording  
is displayed on a CBK-SD01 SDI Output Board. Playback  
picture cannot be output.  
You can adjust the value of the white balance manually by  
setting the color temperature.  
1
Display the WHITE page of the PAINT menu.  
For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu  
You can set the following items on the WHITE page.  
1
2
3
Display the OUTPUT page of the OPERATION  
menu.  
Item  
Description  
COLOR TEMP  
<A>  
Sets the color temperature for the  
desired value. Adjust the value  
while looking at the real image  
because error tends to be bigger  
for adjustment of high color  
temperature.  
For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu  
Press the MENU knob. Then turn the MENU knob to  
move b to REAR BNC OUT SEL, and press the  
MENU knob again.  
COLOR FINE <A> Adjusts the value more precisely  
when the color temperature  
b changes to z and z changes to ?.  
adjustment through COLOR  
TEMP is not satisfactory.  
Turn the MENU knob to change the desired setting,  
and press the MENU knob.  
R GAIN <A>  
B GAIN <A>  
D5600K <A>  
Changes only the value of R  
GAIN.  
Changes only the value of B  
GAIN.  
The settings of SDI and VBS are follows.  
Sets the color temperature to  
approximately 5600K.  
Setting value  
Description  
SDI  
Outputs the SDI signal. When SDI  
is selected, connect to the SDI IN  
connector of the video monitor.  
The above table shows the adjustment of the white  
balance of channel A. Items followed by <B> are used  
to adjust the white balance of channel B.  
VBS  
Outputs the analog composite  
video signal. When VBS is  
selected, connect to the VIDEO  
IN connector of the video monitor.  
This setting allows you to save the  
power.  
2
Perform the settings for each item.  
z changes to b and ? changes to z. The selection is  
set.  
104  
Adjustments and Settings from Menus  
       
Specifying an offset for the auto  
white balance setting  
Setting the date/time of the internal  
clock  
By setting an offset for the value of auto white balance,  
you can make the picture warmer or colder.  
You can set or change the date and time of the internal  
clock. The date and time set here are reflected in the time  
code.  
1
Display the OFFSET WHT page of the OPERATION  
menu.  
1
Display the TIME/DATE page of the DIAGNOSIS  
menu.  
For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu  
For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu  
You can set the following items in the OFFSET WHT  
page.  
?D02 TIME/DATE  
CLOCK ADJUST  
TOP  
:
EXEC  
Item  
Description  
HOUR  
MIN  
SEC  
YEAR  
MONTH  
DAY  
:
:
:
:
:
:
12  
55  
58  
00  
07  
31  
OFFSET WHITE  
<A>  
Selects if the offset adjusted on  
this page is added to the white  
balance for channel A.  
WARM-COOL <A> When OFFSET WHITE <A> is  
ON, sets the offset for the white  
balance of channel A, using the  
color temperature. Adjust the  
value while looking at the real  
image because error tends to be  
bigger for adjustment of high color  
temperature.  
2
Press the MENU knob. Then turn the MENU knob to  
move b to CLOCK ADJUST, and press the MENU  
knob again.  
The TIME ADJUST screen appears.  
You can set the following items on the TIME ADJUST  
screen.  
COLOR FINE <A> Adjusts the value more precisely if  
the adjustment by WARM-COOL  
<A> is not satisfactory.  
Item  
Description  
OFFSET WHITE  
<B>  
Selects if the offset adjusted on  
this page is added to the white  
balance for channel B.  
HOUR  
MIN  
Sets the hour value.  
Sets the minutes value.  
Sets the seconds value.  
Sets the year.  
WARM-COOL <B> When OFFSET WHITE <B> is  
ON, sets the offset for the white  
balance of channel B, using the  
color temperature. Adjust the  
value while looking at the real  
image because error tends to be  
bigger for adjustment of high color  
temperature.  
SEC  
YEAR  
MONTH  
DAY  
Sets the month.  
Sets the day.  
3
4
Set the each item to the desired value.  
COLOR FINE <B> Adjusts the value more precisely if  
the adjustment by WARM-COOL  
When you finish settings, turn the MENU knob to  
move b to OK, then press the MENU knob.  
<B> is not satisfactory.  
The internal clock is set with the date and time set in  
step 3. The TIME/DATE page of the DIAGNOSIS  
menu appears again. The time set on the TIME  
ADJUST screen displayed.  
2
3
Set the WHITE BAL switch to the channel (A or B)  
that you want to set.  
Note  
If the WHITE BAL switch is not set to A or B, the  
adjusted value does not affect the video output even  
though you follow the step below.  
To cancel the setting  
Before executing step 4, move b to ESC and press the  
MENU knob.  
All settings or changes are discarded and the TIME/DATE  
page appears again.  
Perform the settings for each item.  
If you want to set the another channel, go back to step  
2.  
105  
Adjustments and Settings from Menus  
       
To return to the previous page  
Move b to ESC at the right top of the window and press  
the MENU knob.  
Assigning functions to ASSIGN  
switches  
The FUNCTION 1 page is displayed again.  
You can assign the desired function to any of the ASSIGN  
switches.  
Selecting the lens file  
1
Display the FUNCTION 1 page on the OPERATION  
menu.  
You can change the lens file according to the lens in use.  
For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu  
1
Display the LENS FILE menu of the OPERATION  
menu.  
You can assign functions to each ASSIGN switch as  
follows.  
For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu  
Item  
Description  
The LENS FILE page shows the name and the iris  
setting value of the lens currently selected.  
ASSIGN SW <1>  
Assigns the function to ASSIGN 1  
switch.  
ASSIGN SW <2>  
ASSIGN SW <3>  
ASSIGN SW <4>  
Assigns the function to ASSIGN 2  
switch.  
? 17 LENS FILE  
LENS FILE SELECT:  
F.ID :J22ex7.6B  
TOP  
2
Lens file number  
Assigns the function to ASSIGN 3  
switch.  
Lens name and iris  
setting value  
Assigns the function to ASSIGN 4  
switch.  
2
Press the MENU knob. Then turn the MENU knob to  
move b to the item corresponding to the switch to  
which you want to assign the function, and press the  
MENU knob again.  
2
Set LENS FILE SELECT to the lens file number  
corresponding to the lens in use.  
If you do not want to use a lens file  
Set LENS FILE SELECT to the lens file number 1  
(F.ID: No offset).  
The corresponding ASSIGN SW (1 to 4) SEL window  
appears. You can assign the following functions to the  
ASSIGN switch.  
Item  
Description  
Selecting the aspect ratio  
(DSR-450WS/450WSP only)  
OFF  
Assigns no function.  
MARKER  
Assigns the ON/OFF function to  
display all markers.*  
You can select the aspect ratio of the video output signal.  
ATW  
Assigns the ON/OFF switch  
function of ATW.  
1
Display the FORMAT menu of the OPERATION  
menu.  
LENS RET  
REC SWITCH  
Assigns the function of recording  
review.  
Assigns the VTR start/stop  
function.  
For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu  
TURBO SWITCH Assigns the turbo gain value set in  
TURBO GAIN (page 103).  
? 18 FORMAT  
16:9/4:3 SELECT :  
WIDE ID  
SCAN MODE  
16:9  
ON  
* Even when the MARKER item is set to OFF on the MARKER 1 page  
of the OPERATION menu, the ASSIGN switches allow you to  
display or not to display all markers.  
:
:
I
3
Turn the MENU knob to move b to the desired  
function, and press the MENU knob.  
The function is assigned, and the FUNCTION 1 page  
appears again.  
2
Set 16:9/4:3 SELECT to the desired aspect ratio.  
106  
Adjustments and Settings from Menus  
       
I (interlace scan) mode  
To display the aspect ratio of 16:9 or 4:3 on  
the viewfinder  
By setting the DISP 16:9/4:3 ID item to ON on the VF  
DISP 2 page of the OPERATION menu, “16:9” or “4:3”  
appears on the viewfinder screen according to the setting  
of the procedure above.  
CCD output  
Video output signal  
O: Odd E: Even  
The video signal of an odd scanning line and that of an even  
scanning line are output from the CCD alternately. Thus, the  
timing of the odd-field video signal and even field video signal  
are different.  
To display “16:9” in color bars  
By setting the SHOT 16:9 ID item to ON on the SHOT  
DISP page of the OPERATION menu, you can record a  
“16:9” mode indicator superimposed on the color bars.  
PsF (progressive scan) mode  
CCD output  
NTSC (DSR-450WS)  
Video output signal  
O: Odd E: Even  
The video signal of an odd scanning line and that of an even  
scanning line are output from the CCD at the same time.  
Then they are sent to the memory and separated into odd-  
field and even-field scanning lines. Thus the timing of an  
odd-field video signal and an even-field video signal are the  
same.  
PAL (DSR-450WSP)  
Pulldown method in 24P mode (DSR-  
450WS only)  
A video signal recorded in 24P mode is pulled down and  
recorded as a 60i signal and recorded on a tape. You can  
select either of the following pulldown methods using the  
FORMAT page of the OPERATION menu.  
• 2-3 pulldown  
• 2-3-3-2 pulldown  
Note  
Setting the CCD scan mode  
(DSR-450WS/450WSP only)  
When 2-3-3-2 pulldown is selected, only a signal recorded  
on a tape or output from the i.LINK connector is 2-3-3-2  
pulled down. A signal that is output to the viewfinder,  
LCD monitor, MONITOR OUT connector, or VIDEO  
OUT connector is 60i (2-3 pulldown).  
The DSR-450WS/450WSP allow you to record in  
progressive scan mode as well as interlace scan mode. You  
can select the scan mode from the following modes using  
the FORMAT page of the OPERATION menu.  
• I (interlace scan) mode  
• PsF (progressive scan) mode  
• 24P mode (DSR-450WS only)  
A video signal recorded in progressive mode is converted  
to a 60i signal and recorded on a tape. Each of the modes  
has the following features.  
107  
Adjustments and Settings from Menus  
 
.
24P PULLDWN  
MODE  
DF/NDF  
Purpose  
Notes  
2.3  
DF  
To obtain film-like  
image as interlace  
signal.  
(2-3 pulldown)  
NDF  
To re-convert to 24P  
with non-linear editing  
software (NLE).  
(Select according to  
your NLE.)  
You can start recording at frame 0 or frame 5 of the time code.  
Therefore, when setting the time code or recording in backspace  
editing mode, the value of the least significant digit is limited to 0  
or 5.  
• There will be noise on the recorded image if you change the  
operating mode for the internal time code generator using the F-  
RUN/SET/R-RUN switch under the AUDIO adjustment cover while  
recording.  
• The video and audio signal and time code output via i.LINK may  
not be consecutive when recording starts.  
Notes on 2-3 pulldown  
• When dropframe time code is input via the TC IN connector, this  
unit operates in DF mode and synchronization of the pulldown  
picture and the time code is disabled. This setting will continue in  
effect until the time code setting (F-RUN/R-RUN or DF/NDF) is  
changed.  
2.3.3.2  
(2-3-3-2 pulldown)  
(NDF only)  
• When the PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK switch under the AUDIO  
adjustment cover is set to CLOCK, this unit operates in DF mode.  
The synchronization of the time code and the pulled down image  
is disabled.  
Notes on 2-3-3-2 pulldown  
• When the PRESET/REGEN/CLOCK switch under the AUDIO  
adjustment cover is set to CLOCK, the time code is synchronized  
to the internal clock, and this unit operates in F-RUN and NDF  
mode.  
• When drop frame time code is input to the TC IN connector, this  
unit does not operate sychronized to that time code.  
2-3 pulldown in 24P mode  
1/23.98 seconds  
CCD output  
A ( O + E )  
B ( O + E )  
C ( O + E )  
D ( O + E )  
A ( O + E )  
A O  
A E  
B O  
B E  
B O  
C E  
C O  
D E  
D O  
D E  
A O  
A E  
Video output signal  
O: Odd E: Even  
After reading from the CCDs in 24P mode (23.98 frames per second),  
a pull down conversion is carried out to the 30 frames (29.97 frames  
per second) of the normal progressive scan mode.  
1/29.97 seconds  
2-3-3-2 pulldown in 24P mode  
1/23.98 seconds  
CCD output  
A ( O + E )  
B ( O + E )  
C ( O + E )  
D ( O + E )  
A ( O + E )  
A O  
A E  
B O  
B E  
B O  
C E  
C O  
C E  
D O  
D E  
A O  
A E  
Video output signal  
O: Odd E: Even  
1/29.97 seconds  
108  
Adjustments and Settings from Menus  
             
Saving and Loading the  
User Setting Data  
Chapter  
To insert a “Memory Stick”  
Saving and Loading User  
Files  
1
Remove the “Memory Stick” slot cover on the back of  
the camcorder.  
The camcorder is equipped with a “Memory Stick” slot,  
which enables you to save the settings in the USER menu  
as a user file onto the “Memory Stick”. You can load these  
files from the “Memory Stick” for immediate recall of a  
particular setting configuration. In addition to user file,  
you can save scene files, lens files, reference files and ALL  
files in a “Memory Stick”.  
When a menu is displayed, you can set up the camcorder  
so that inserting a “Memory Stick” automatically jumps to  
the appropriate file-related menu page.  
2
Insert the “Memory Stick” with its label side facing the  
“Memory Stick” logo on the camcorder.  
For details about scene files, see “Saving and Loading  
For details about lens files, reference files and ALL files,  
For details of the function for jumping to the appropriate  
file-related menu page, see “Displaying a File-Related  
117.  
Label side of “Memory Stick”  
Note  
If it does not fit into the slot properly or if there is some  
resistance when you insert it, the “Memory Stick” may be  
turned around or upside down. Do not force the “Memory  
Stick” into the slot. Confirm the direction of the notch and  
arrow on the “Memory Stick” before inserting the  
“Memory Stick”, and then try inserting it again.  
Handling the “Memory Stick”  
The “Memory Stick” can be inserted to or removed from  
the camcorder with the power turned on or off.  
“Memory Stick” usable with this  
camcorder  
To remove the “Memory Stick”  
With this camcorder, you can use “Memory Stick” whose  
capacity does not exceed 128 MB.  
1
Check that the access indicator is not lit, then gently  
press in the “Memory Stick” once and release.  
The “Memory Stick” pops out.  
109  
Saving and Loading User Files  
                 
Saving USER menu data (user file)  
to the “Memory Stick”  
You can save USER menu settings held in the camcorder  
as user files in the “Memory Stick”.  
You can save up to 100 user files in the “Memory Stick”.  
Insert the “Memory Stick” into the “Memory Stick” slot,  
then proceed as follows.  
Check that the access  
indicator is not lit.  
Gently press in and release.  
1
Display the USER FILE page of the FILE menu.  
2
Pull the “Memory Stick” towards you to withdraw it  
from the slot.  
For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu  
Note  
?F01 USER FILE  
TOP  
Do not remove the “Memory Stick” while the access  
indicator is lit. You may lose data, or damage the “Memory  
Stick”.  
USER FILE LOAD  
USER FILE SAVE  
:
:
EXEC  
EXEC  
F.ID : sssssssssssssssss  
USER PRESET EXEC  
:
To protect saved data  
To prevent accidental erasure of important setup data, slide  
the LOCK switch on the “Memory Stick” right to the write  
protect position.  
To set a file ID for the data to be saved  
Set the file ID before going to step 2. For details on  
setting the file ID, see “To set the file ID” on page 111.  
2
Press the MENU knob. Then turn the MENU knob to  
move b to USER FILE SAVE, and press the MENU  
knob again.  
The USER SAVE page appears.  
It is now impossible to write or delete data on the  
“Memory Stick”. If you try to do so, the message  
“MEMORY STICK LOCKED” appears and the data  
cannot be overwritten or deleted.  
?P00 USER SAVE  
DISPLAY MODE  
ESC  
ALL  
:
001.NEW FILE  
002.NEW FILE  
003.NEW FILE  
004.NEW FILE  
005.NEW FILE  
Notes on using and storing the “Memory  
Stick”  
• Avoid touching the connector of the “Memory Stick” or  
contacting it with a metal object.  
• When attaching a label to the “Memory Stick”, use only  
the label supplied for the “Memory Stick”.  
• Do not drop, bend, or submit the “Memory Stick” to  
external shock.  
• Do not disassemble or modify the “Memory Stick”.  
• Avoid getting liquids on the “Memory Stick”.  
• Avoid using or storing the “Memory Stick” in a location  
subject to:  
- extremely high temperature such as the hot inside of a  
car or the outdoors exposed to a burning sun, or a place  
near a heater.  
Up to 20 pages, from P00 to P19, can be used to save  
user files in the “Memory Stick”. Each page can hold  
up to 5 files.  
3
4
Turn the MENU knob until the page which contains  
the desired file number appears, and press the MENU  
knob.  
P00 USER SAVE  
DISPLAY MODE  
ESC  
ALL  
:
001.NEW FILE  
002.NEW FILE  
003.NEW FILE  
004.NEW FILE  
005.NEW FILE  
- direct sunlight.  
• When storing and carrying the “Memory Stick”, keep it  
in its original case to ensure protection of important data.  
• Do not format the “Memory Stick” using a PC.  
Format the “Memory Stick” on the MEMORY STICK  
page of the FILE menu.  
Turn the MENU knob to move b to the desired file  
number, and press the MENU knob.  
110  
Saving and Loading User Files  
     
The message “SAVE OK? YES b NO” appears.  
To set the file ID  
Before data is saved to a “Memory Stick”, it is useful to set  
a file ID for the “Memory Stick” to identify it.  
When data is saved to a “Memory Stick”, the file ID is  
saved to the “Memory Stick” together with the data.  
P00 USER SAVE  
SAVE OK?  
DISPLAY MODE  
ESC  
ALL  
When a file number is  
shown as NEW FILE, this  
means that the file is  
empty. When data is  
stored in a file number, the  
file name appears.  
YES NO  
:
001.NEW FILE  
002.NEW FILE  
003.NEW FILE  
004.NEW FILE  
005.NEW FILE  
Note  
Set the file ID before saving data in the “Memory Stick”.  
Otherwise, the file ID is not saved with the other data.  
5
To carry out the save, turn the MENU knob to move b  
to YES and press the MENU knob.  
To cancel, press the MENU knob leaving bpointing to  
NO.  
1
Display the USER FILE page of the FILE menu.  
For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu  
The access indicator lights. When the saving is  
completed, the message “COMPLETE” appears and  
the access indicator goes off.  
2
Press the MENU knob. Then turn the MENU knob to  
move b to F. ID, and then press the MENU knob  
again.  
If no “Memory Stick” has been inserted, the message  
“NO MEMORY STICK” will appear. Insert a  
“Memory Stick”.  
A character table appears.  
F01 USER FILE  
TOP  
If you select a file number where data has  
already been saved  
USER FILE LOAD  
USER FILE SAVE  
:
:
EXEC  
EXEC  
The message “OVERWRITE OK? YES b NO”  
appears.  
F.ID :?  
x
$%&'()*+,-./0123456789:  
;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQR  
STUVWXYZ[\]_  
• To stop overwriting, press the MENU knob leaving  
b pointing to NO.  
INS DEL RET  
ESC END  
• To overwrite, turn the MENU knob to move b to  
YES and press the MENU knob.  
3
4
Follow steps 3 and 4 described in “Setting the shot  
ID” on page 101 to enter characters.  
You can select the information displayed on each  
USER SAVE or USER LOAD page.  
When you finish entering the file ID, turn the MENU  
knob to move x to END, then press the MENU knob.  
The entered file ID is now displayed.  
About the USER menu settings to be saved in the  
“Memory Stick”  
Settings for items on all pages of the USER menu are  
saved in the “Memory Stick” as a user file.  
13 USER FILE  
TOP  
USER FILE LOAD  
USER FILE SAVE  
:
:
EXEC  
EXEC  
F.ID : ID-001  
USER PRESET  
:
EXEC  
If data cannot be saved  
If one of the following error messages appears during or  
after the save operation, then the data was not saved.  
File ID that has been set appears.  
Error message  
Cause  
Action  
NO MEMORY  
STICK (flashing)  
No “Memory Stick” Insert or reinsert  
After setting the file ID, carry out the procedure from  
is inserted.  
the “Memory  
Stick”.  
MEMORY STICK The LOCK switch Set the LOCK  
LOCKED on the “Memory switch to the write  
The set file ID is saved in the “Memory Stick” with the  
data.  
Stick” is set to the enable position.  
write protect  
position.  
MEMORY STICK Circuit or “Memory Check the  
To select the display contents  
You can select the contents of the file to be displayed on  
the USER FILE SAVE page and USER FILE LOAD page  
ERROR (flashing) Stick” fault.  
circuitry, or  
replace the  
“Memory Stick”.  
111  
Saving and Loading User Files  
     
(P00 to P19), that are the pages to save and call up the data  
to and from “Memory Stick”.  
3
4
Turn the MENU knob until the page which contains  
the desired file appears.  
1
2
3
Display the USER FILE LOAD page or the USER  
FILE SAVE page of the USER FILE menu.  
Press the MENU knob. Then turn the MENU knob to  
move b to the desired file number to be loaded, and  
press the MENU knob again.  
For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu  
The message “LOAD OK? YES b NO” appears.  
P00 USER LOAD  
LOAD OK?  
DISPLAY MODE  
ESC  
ALL  
Press the MENU knob. Then turn the MENU knob to  
move b to DISPLAY MODE, and press the MENU  
knob again.  
YES NO  
:
001.USER1  
002.USER2  
003.NO FILE  
004.USER4  
005.USER5  
JAN/01/04  
JAN/15/04  
FEB/05/04  
FEB/20/04  
b changes to z and z changes to ?.  
Turn the MENU knob until the desired type of the  
display contents (see the following table) appears, then  
press the MENU knob.  
5
To carry out the load, turn the MENU knob to move b  
to YES and press the MENU knob.  
To cancel, press the MENU knob leaving bpointing to  
NO.  
Display type  
Description  
ALL  
File ID (10 characters) and date  
(month/day/year)  
The access indicator lights.  
When the load is completed, the message  
“COMPLETE” appears and the access indicator goes  
off.  
F.ID  
File ID (16 characters)  
DATE  
Saved date (year/month/day/  
hours/minutes/seconds)  
The USER FILE page appears again.  
MODEL  
Information on the model  
If data cannot be loaded  
If one of the following error messages appears during or  
after the load operation, then the data was not loaded.  
z changes to b and ? changes to z. The selection is  
set.  
Error message  
Cause  
Action  
Loading saved data from a “Memory  
Stick”  
NO MEMORY  
STICK (flashing)  
No “Memory Stick” Insert or reinsert  
is inserted.  
the “Memory  
Stick”.  
MEMORY STICK Circuit or “Memory Recheck, and  
Note  
ERROR (flashing) Stick” fault.  
consult your Sony  
representative.  
The data loaded from the “Memory Stick” overwrites the  
data saved in the camcorder.  
FILE ERROR  
(flashing)  
The “Memory  
Stick” contains  
You cannot load  
data saved from  
1
Display the USER FILE page of the FILE menu.  
For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu  
2
Press the MENU knob. Then turn the MENU knob to  
move b to USER FILE LOAD, and press the MENU  
knob again.  
The P00 USER LOAD page appears.  
?P00 USER LOAD  
DISPLAY MODE  
ESC  
ALL  
:
001.USER1  
002.USER2  
003.NO FILE  
004.USER4  
005.USER5  
JAN/01/04  
JAN/15/04  
FEB/05/04  
FEB/20/04  
112  
Saving and Loading User Files  
   
?P00 SCENE STORE  
DISPLAY MODE  
ESC  
ALL  
:
Saving and Loading  
Scene Files  
MEM-01:STANDARD  
MEM-02:STANDARD  
MEM-03:STANDARD  
MEM-04:STANDARD  
MEM-05:STANDARD  
You can save various settings for shooting a particular  
scene as a scene file. Loading the scene file, you can  
quickly recreate setup conditions suitable for the scene.  
You can save up to five scene files in the camcorder  
memory and up to 100 scene files in a “Memory Stick”.  
You can also load data from the “Memory Stick” into the  
camcorder memory and vice versa.  
3
Press the MENU knob. Then turn the MENU knob to  
move b to the desired file number, and press the  
MENU knob again.  
The file to be saved is selected.  
When no “Memory Stick” is inserted  
Press the MENU knob. Then turn the MENU knob to  
move b to the desired memory number, and press the  
MENU knob again.  
When the save is completed, the SCENE FILE page  
appears again.  
Data that can be saved in a scene file  
You can save the following data in a scene file:  
• Values adjusted using the PAINT menu  
• Shutter speed settings made in the standard mode and  
ECS mode  
• The white balance data included in a scene file depends  
on the SCENE WHITE DATA setting on the  
REFERENCE page of the FILE menu.  
When you select a file number where data has  
already been saved  
The message “OVERWRITE OK? YES b NO”  
appears.  
For details of the PAINT menu, refer to “The PAINT  
• To stop overwriting, press the MENU knob leaving  
b positioning to NO.  
• To overwrite, turn the MENU knob to move b to  
YES and press the MENU knob.  
For details of white balance data, see “White balance  
When a “Memory Stick” is inserted  
You can use up to 20 pages, from P01 to P20, to save  
scene files in the “Memory Stick”. Each page can hold  
up to 5 files.  
Saving a scene file  
To save a scene file in the “Memory Stick”, insert the  
“Memory Stick” into the “Memory Stick” slot before  
starting the operation.  
1 Turn the MENU knob until the page which  
contains the desired file appears, then press the  
MENU knob.  
1
Display the SCENE FILE page of the FILE menu.  
P01 SCENE STORE  
DISPLAY MODE  
ESC  
ALL  
For details on menu operation, see “Basic menu  
:
001.SCENE1  
FEB/05/02  
002.STANDARD  
003.STANDARD  
004.STANDARD  
005.STANDARD  
F04 SCENE FILE  
TOP  
s
s
s
s
s
s
1
2
3
4
5
:STANDARD  
:STANDARD  
:STANDARD  
:STANDARD  
:STANDARD  
***.5FILE SAVE  
MEM1-5  
STANDARD  
2 Turn the MENU knob to move b to the desired file  
number, and press the MENU knob.  
SCENE RECALL  
SCENE STORE  
F.ID: STANDARD  
:
:
EXEC  
EXEC  
The message “STORE OK? YES b NO” appears.  
To set a file ID for the data to be saved  
Set the file ID before going to step 2.  
For details on setting the file ID, see “To set the file  
P01 SCENE STORE  
STORE OK?  
DISPLAY MODE  
ESC  
ALL  
YES NO  
:
001.SCENE1  
FEB/05/02  
002.STANDARD  
003.STANDARD  
004.STANDARD  
005.STANDARD  
2
Press the MENU knob. Then turn the MENU knob to  
move b to SCENE STORE, and press the MENU  
knob again.  
***.5FILE SAVE  
MEM1-5  
The SCENE STORE page appears.  
113  
Saving and Loading Scene Files  
       
3 To carry out the storing, turn the MENU knob to  
move b to YES and press the MENU knob.  
To cancel, press the MENU knob leaving b  
pointing to NO.  
3
4
Turn the MENU knob until the desired SCENE  
STORE page appears, then press the MENU knob.  
P01 SCENE STORE  
DISPLAY MODE  
ESC  
ALL  
:
You can select the contents of the user file to be  
displayed on each page of SCENE STORE and  
SCENE RECALL.  
001.SCENE1  
002.SCENE2  
003.NO FILE  
004.SCENE4  
005.SCENE5  
FEB/05/02  
FEB/06/02  
FEB/08/02  
FEB/08/02  
***.5FILE SAVE  
MEM1-5  
Turn the MENU knob to move b to 5FILE SAVE b  
MEM1-5, and press the MENU knob.  
White balance setting data saved in the  
scene file  
The message “STORE OK? YES b NO” appears.  
The white balance setting data saved in the scene file refers  
to the value of white balance during saving, that is, when  
the WHITE BAL switch is set to A, the adjusted values in  
memory A are saved in the scene file, and when the  
WHITE BAL switch is set to PRST, the preset value is  
saved.  
P01 SCENE STORE  
STORE OK?  
DISPLAY MODE  
ESC  
ALL  
YES NO  
:
001.SCENE1  
002.SCENE2  
003.NO FILE  
004.SCENE4  
005.SCENE5  
***.5FILE SAVE  
MEM1-5  
White balance setting data when loading  
the scene file  
The method for loading the white balance setting data  
when loading the scene file differs depending on the  
setting of the SCENE WHITE DATA item on the  
REFERENCE page.  
5
To carry out the save, turn the MENU knob to move b  
to YES and press the MENU knob.  
To cancel, press the MENU knob leaving bpointing to  
NO.  
When the save is completed, the message  
“COMPLETE” appears.  
F05 REFERENCE  
REFERENCE STORE :  
REFERENCE CLEAR :  
EXEC  
EXEC  
Note  
REFERENCE LOAD  
REFERENCE SAVE  
:
:
EXEC  
EXEC  
F.ID: sssssssssssssssss  
If files have been saved in the page selected in step 3, those  
files are replaced with files loaded from the camcorder  
memory. For example, files from 001 to 005 are replaced  
on the above procedure.  
SCENE WHITE DATA: OFF  
When SCENE WHITE DATA is set to ON  
The white balance setting data saved in the scene file is  
loaded. (However it is not loaded when the WHITE BAL  
switch on the camcorder is set to PRST.)  
To set the file ID  
Before the data is saved as a scene file, it is useful to set a  
file ID to identify it. The set file ID is saved together with  
the data.  
When SCENE WHITE DATA is set to OFF  
The white balance setting data is not loaded.  
1
Display the SCENE FILE page of the FILE menu.  
For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu  
To save scene files from the camcorder  
memory to the “Memory Stick”  
You can save five scene files from the camcorder to the  
“Memory Stick” in a single operation.  
2
Press the MENU knob. Then turn the MENU knob to  
move b to F. ID, and press the MENU knob again.  
1
Display the SCENE FILE page of the FILE menu.  
A character table appears.  
For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu  
F04 SCENE FILE  
TOP  
!#$%&'()*+,-./012345678  
9:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP  
QRSTUVWXYZ[ ]abcdefghijk  
lmnopqrstuvwxyz~  
2
Press the MENU knob. Then turn the MENU knob to  
move b to SCENE STORE, then press the MENU  
knob again.  
INS DEL RET  
STANDARD  
ESC END  
s
SCENE RECALL  
SCENE STORE  
F.ID :STANDARD  
:
:
EXEC  
EXEC  
114  
Saving and Loading Scene Files  
       
3
Press the MENU knob. Then turn the MENU knob  
until x moves to the character position that you want  
to select, then press the MENU knob.  
b to the desired file number, and press the MENU  
knob again.  
s on the left of the file number changes to x. The  
camcorder is set up according to the loaded scene file.  
Example: When entering the letter “+”  
F04 SCENE FILE  
TOP  
F04 SCENE FILE  
TOP  
!#$%&'()*+,-./012345678  
9:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP  
QRSTUVWXYZ[ ]abcdefghijk  
lmnopqrstuvwxyz~  
s
x
s
s
s
s
1
2
3
4
5
:SCENE 25  
:SCENE 26  
:SCENE 27  
:SCENE 28  
:NO FILE  
INS DEL RET  
STANDARD  
ESC END  
s
STANDARD  
SCENE RECALL  
SCENE STORE  
F.ID :+TANDARD  
:
:
EXEC  
EXEC  
SCENE RECALL  
SCENE STORE  
F.ID :SCENE21  
:
:
EXEC  
EXEC  
To cancel the selected scene file  
4
5
Repeat step 3 for each of the remaining characters.  
Turn the MENU knob to move b to x, and press the  
MENU knob. x changes to s. The camcorder returns  
to the settings before selecting this scene file.  
Note  
Set the file ID before saving the scene file in the  
“Memory Stick” or the camcorder memory.  
Otherwise, the file ID is not saved with the other data.  
To load a scene file saved in the “Memory  
Stick”  
1 Turn the MENU knob to move b to SCENE  
When the input is complete, turn the MENU knob to  
move x over END, then press the MENU knob.  
RECALL, and press the MENU knob.  
The file ID is set, and the SCENE FILE page appears  
again.  
The SCENE RECALL page appears.  
?P00 SCENE RECALL  
ESC  
04 SCENE FILE  
TOP  
DISPLAY MODE  
:
F.ID  
s
s
s
s
s
s
1
2
3
4
5
:STANDARD  
:STANDARD  
:STANDARD  
:STANDARD  
:STANDARD  
MEM-1:STANDARD  
MEM-2:STANDARD  
MEM-3:STANDARD  
MEM-4:STANDARD  
MEM-5:NO FILE  
File ID  
STANDARD  
SCENE RECALL  
SCENE STORE  
F.ID: SCENE21  
:
:
EXEC  
EXEC  
2 Turn the MENU knob until the page which  
Carry out the procedure from step 2 in “Saving a scene  
file” on page 113. The set file ID is saved together  
with the data.  
contains the desired file appears.  
3 Press the MENU knob. Then turn the MENU knob  
to move b to the desired file number, and press the  
MENU knob again.  
To select the display contents  
You can select the items of file information to be displayed  
on the SCENE STORE pages (P01 to P20) or the SCENE  
RECALL pages (P01 to P20) used for saving data to or  
loading data from a “Memory Stick”.  
The message “RECALL OK? YES b NO”  
appears.  
P01 SCENE RECALL  
RECALL OK? YES NO  
ESC  
ALL  
DISPLAY MODE  
:
For details to select the item, “To select the display  
001.SCENE1  
002.SCENE2  
003.NO FILE  
004.SCENE4  
005.SCENE5  
***.5FILE LOAD  
MEM1-5  
Loading scene files  
3
To carry out the recall, turn the MENU knob to move  
b to YES and press the MENU knob.  
To cancel, press the MENU knob leaving bpointing to  
NO.  
1
Display the SCENE FILE page of the FILE menu.  
For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu  
When the loading is completed, the message  
“COMPLETE” appears. The camcorder is set up  
2
To load the scene file stored in the camcorder, press  
the MENU knob. Then turn the MENU knob to move  
115  
Saving and Loading Scene Files  
   
according to the loaded scene file. If no file is present  
with a particular file number, this is shown as “NO  
FILE”.  
Resetting the settings of the  
camcorder to the standard settings  
You can reset the settings of the camcorder to the settings  
saved in the reference file (standard settings).  
To load scene files from a “Memory Stick”  
into the camcorder memory  
For the items to be saved in the reference file, see page 74.  
You can load up to five scene files stored in the “Memory  
Stick” into the camcorder memory in a single operation.  
1
Display the SCENE FILE page of the FILE menu.  
1
Display the SCENE FILE page of the FILE menu.  
For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu  
For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu  
2
Press the MENU knob. Then turn the MENU knob to  
move b to STANDARD, and press the MENU knob  
again.  
2
Press the MENU knob. Then turn the MENU knob to  
move b to SCENE RECALL, and press the MENU  
knob again.  
F04 SCENE FILE  
TOP  
The SCENE RECALL page appears.  
s
s
s
s
s
x
1
2
3
4
5
:SCENE 25  
:SCENE 26  
:SCENE 27  
:SCENE 28  
:NO FILE  
3
4
Turn the MENU knob until the SCENE RECALL  
page which contains the desired scene files appears.  
STANDARD  
SCENE RECALL  
SCENE STORE  
F.ID :SCENE21  
:
:
EXEC  
EXEC  
Press the MENU knob. Then turn the MENU knob to  
move b to 5FILE LOAD B MEM 1-5, and press the  
MENU knob.  
s displayed on the left of STANDARD changes to x.  
When x changes to s once again, the settings of the  
camcorder are reset to the settings saved in the  
reference file.  
The message “RECALL OK? YES b NO” appears.  
P01 SCENE RECALL  
RECALL OK? YES NO  
ESC  
ALL  
DISPLAY MODE  
:
If you press the MENU knob again while x is  
displayed, the operation is cancelled and the  
camcorder returns to the settings before STANDARD  
was selected.  
001.SCENE1  
002.SCENE2  
003.NO FILE  
004.SCENE4  
005.SCENE5  
***.5FILE LOAD  
MEM1-5  
5
To carry out the recall, turn the MENU knob to move  
b YES and press the MENU knob.  
To cancel, press the MENU knob leaving bpointing to  
NO.  
When loading is complete, the message  
“COMPLETE” appears and the access indicator goes  
off.  
Notes  
• The scene files loaded from the “Memory Stick”  
overwrite data saved in the camcorder memory.  
• To load the scene file saved in the camcorder memory  
when the “Memory Stick” is inserted, return to the P00  
SCENE RECALL page and load the desired scene file in  
the camcorder memory.  
• When there is no file to be loaded (shown as “NO  
FILE”), an existing file of the same number is  
unaffected. In the example shown in step 4, MEM(3) is  
not overwritten.  
116  
Saving and Loading Scene Files  
       
4
Press the MENU knob.  
Displaying a File-Related  
Menu Page When  
Inserting a “Memory  
Stick”  
z changes to b, and ? changes to z. The selection is  
set.  
Note  
In the following cases, displaying the target page is  
impossible even when the “Memory Stick” is inserted.  
• When the power is turned on after you insert a “Memory  
Stick”  
• When OFF is selected for the MS IN > JUMP TO item  
• When any of the following menu pages is already  
displayed  
A “Memory Stick” enables you to save user files, scene  
files, lens files, reference files and ALL files.  
The camcorder menu system allows you to make a setting  
so that when a “Memory Stick” holding these files is  
inserted while in menu operating mode, a menu page  
relating to the desired file is automatically displayed on the  
screen. Thus you can proceed to file operation quickly.  
This is very convenient especially when you manage data  
files using “Memory Stick”s.  
- A file-related page such as the USER FILE page of the  
FILE menu  
- MEMORY STICK, ALL FILE, SCENE FILE, LENS  
FILE, or REFERENCE FILE page  
1
Display the MEMORY STICK page of the FILE  
menu.  
For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu  
F09 MEMORY STICK  
TOP  
FORMAT :  
MS IN > JUMP TO :  
EXEC  
OFF  
2
3
Press the MENU knob. Then turn the MENU knob to  
move b to MS IN > JUMP TO, and press the MENU  
knob again.  
b on the left of MS IN > JUMP TO changes to z and  
z on the left of setting value changes to ?.  
Turn the MENU knob to select the desired setting  
(target FILE menu page).  
You can select the setting in the chart below.  
Setting  
Description  
OFF  
Disables this function. The page  
does not switch even when  
“Memory Stick” is inserted.  
USER  
ALL  
Displays the USER FILE page.  
Displays the ALL FILE page.  
Displays the SCENE FILE page.  
Displays the LENS FILE 1 page.  
Displays the REFERENCE page.  
Displays the USER 1 page.  
SCENE  
LENS  
REFER  
USER 1  
117  
Displaying a File-Related Menu Page When Inserting a “Memory Stick”  
   
Appendix  
Chapter  
• In excessive heat or cold (operating temperature range:  
0°C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F))  
Remember that in summer in warm climates the  
temperature inside a car with the windows closed can  
easily exceed 50°C (122°F).  
Important Notes on  
Operation  
• In damp or dusty locations  
• Locations where the unit may be exposed to rain  
• Locations subject to violent vibration  
• Near strong magnetic fields  
• Close to radio or TV transmitters producing strong  
electromagnetic fields.  
Use and Storage  
Do not subject the unit to severe shocks  
The internal mechanism may be damaged or the body  
warped.  
• In direct sunlight or close to heaters for extended periods  
Do not cover the unit while operating  
Putting a cloth, for example, over the unit can cause  
excessive internal heat build-up.  
To prevent electromagnetic interference from  
portable communications devices  
The use of portable telephones and other communications  
devices near this unit can result in malfunctions and  
interference with audio and video signals.  
After use  
Always turn off the power.  
It is recommended that the portable communications  
devices near this unit be powered off.  
Before storing the camcorder for a long period  
Remove the battery pack.  
Note on laser beams  
Shipping  
Laser beams may damage the CCDs.  
If you shoot a scene that includes a laser beam, be careful  
not to let the laser beam be directed into the lens of the  
camera.  
• Remove the cassette before transporting the unit.  
• If sending the unit by truck, ship, air or other  
transportation service, pack it in the shipping carton of  
the unit.  
Use at a high temperature  
If the unit is used at a high temperature, white flecks may  
appear on the screen.  
Care of the unit  
Remove dust and dirt from the surfaces of the lenses or  
optical filters using a blower.  
If the body of the unit is dirty, clean it with a soft, dry cloth.  
In extreme cases, use a cloth steeped in a little neutral  
detergent, then wipe dry. Do not use organic solvents such  
as alcohol or thinners, as these may cause discoloration or  
other damage to the finish of the unit.  
Fitting the zoom lens  
It is important to fit the lens correctly, as otherwise damage  
may result. Be sure to refer to the section “Mounting the  
In the event of operating problems  
If you should experience problems with the unit, contact  
your Sony dealer.  
Viewfinder  
• Do not leave the unit with the eyepiece pointing directly  
at the sun.  
The eyepiece lens can concentrate the sun’s rays and  
melt the interior of the viewfinder.  
• Do not use the viewfinder close to strong magnetic  
fields. This can cause picture distortion.  
Use and storage locations  
Store in a level, ventilated place. Avoid using or storing the  
unit in the following places.  
118  
Important Notes on Operation  
     
form on the drum. Then, if the camcorder is operated in  
this state, recording and playback may not be performed  
properly.  
Do the following to prevent this from happening.  
• When you move or operate the camcorder in an  
environment where condensation may form, be sure to  
insert a cassette in advance and close the cassette  
compartment lid.  
About the LCD panels  
LCD panels are manufactured with extremely high-  
precision technology that yields effective pixel rates of  
99.99% or higher. However, very rarely, one or more  
pixels may be permanently dark or permanently lit in  
white, red, blue, or green.  
This phenomenon is not a malfunction. Such pixels have  
no effect on the recorded data, and the unit may be used  
with confidence even if they are present.  
• Whenever you turn on the power, check that the HUMID  
indicator does not appear on the color LCD. If it appears,  
wait until it disappears before inserting a cassette.  
Characteristics of CCD sensors  
The following effects may appear in the image. They are  
characteristic of camcorders using CCDs (charge coupled  
devices), and do not indicate a malfunction.  
Bright or dark points of light  
A CCD is made with high-precision technology. However,  
minor bright or dark points of light (red, blue, or green)  
may sometimes appear. This caused by the structure of the  
CCD and is not a malfunction.  
In this case, adjustment of black balance may help to  
improve this problem.  
For details on automatic adjustment of black balance, see  
Vertical smear  
When shooting a very bright object, such as a light, the  
highlight tends to produce vertical tails. This effect is  
much reduced in this camcorder. (Use of the electronic  
shutter increases this effect.)  
Vertical tail on the image  
Monitor screen  
Bright object (electric light,  
sun, etc.)  
White flecks  
White flecks may appear on the screen during use under  
high-temperature conditions. White flecks may also  
appear under normal temperature conditions if the  
sensitivity is increased (especially to +18 dB or higher).  
Aliasing  
When patterns of stripes or lines are shot, they may appear  
jagged.  
Condensation  
If you move the camcorder from a very cold place to a  
warm place, or use it in a damp location, condensation may  
119  
Important Notes on Operation  
   
Preparations for testing  
Make preparations as shown below.  
• Connect a monitor to the MONITOR OUT connector  
Maintenance  
• Connect an earphone or headphones to the EARPHONE  
connector (page 13)  
• Prepare a cassette for test recording (page 47)  
Cleaning the video heads  
Always use the special-purpose Sony DVM-12CLD  
Cleaning Cassette for cleaning the audio and video heads.  
Follow the instructions with the cleaning cassette  
carefully, as inappropriate use of the cleaning cassette can  
damage the heads.  
To perform the auto-check  
1
Display the DEV STATUS 2 page of the DIAGNOSIS  
menu.  
Note  
For details on menu operations, see “Basic menu  
When the DVM-12CLD is inserted in the camcorder, only  
STOP, PLAY, REW and EJECT buttons function.  
?D04 DEV STATUS2  
TOP  
AUTO CHECK  
HUMID TIMER RESET: EXEC  
:
EXEC  
Replacing the video heads  
If cleaning the video heads fails to restore picture quality,  
the heads may be due for replacement.  
Keep a check of the hours of head drum operation: with  
normal use, the heads should need replacing after about  
2,000 hours of use.  
2
3
Press the MENU knob. Then turn the MENU knob to  
move b to AUTO CHECK, and press the MENU knob  
again.  
When the heads need replacement, contact your Sony  
dealer.  
The message “EXECUTE OK? YES b NO” appears.  
Check the hours of head drum operation in the DRUM  
RUNNING item on the HOURS METER page of the  
DIAGNOSIS menu.  
D04 DEV STATUS2  
TOP  
EXECUTE OK? YES NO  
AUTO CHECK EXEC  
HUMID TIMER RESET: EXEC  
:
Replacing other parts  
For replacement of all parts other than the video heads,  
contact your Sony dealer.  
Turn the MENU knob to move b to YES, and press the  
MENU knob.  
The message “AUTO CHECK EXECUTING”  
appears on the viewfinder, and then the LCD monitor  
changes to the AUTO CHECK display. Follow the  
instructions that appear on the LCD monitor.  
Using the auto-check function  
An internal check can be performed automatically using  
the auto-check function of the camcorder. Meanwhile, a  
one minute test recording and playback are also  
performed. Before shooting, it is desirable to perform this  
auto-check to check for problems in the VTR’s internal  
operations based on the results of the internal check  
displayed on the LCD monitor and on the quality of the  
video and audio recordings.  
<AUTO CHECK>  
EJECT  
If there is a cassette in  
the camcorder, follow  
the instructions and  
PLEASE EJECT CASSETTE  
(PUSH EJECT BUTTON)  
eject the cassette.  
<AUTO CHECK>  
LOAD  
INJECT REC TAPE  
120  
Maintenance  
             
4
5
Insert the cassette to be used for test recording and  
playback, and close the cassette lid (page 45).  
To confirm the result  
When the results of the internal check are normal, the  
following message appears. You can use the camcorder if  
there are no problems with the recording quality of the  
video and audio.  
Check the REC/SAVE switch of the cassette before  
inserting it, and if the switch is set to SAVE, set it to  
REC and then insert the cassette.  
<AUTO CHECK>  
<AUTO CHECK>  
REC  
END  
COMPLETE  
PLEASE EJECT CASSETTE  
(PUSH EJECT BUTTON)  
PLEASE RECORDING  
(PUSH REC BUTTON)  
If a problem is indicated in the results, follow the  
instructions in the table below to check the camcorder and  
cassette. If no errors can be found, contact your Sony  
dealer.  
Also, be sure to check the quality of the playback video  
and audio (see step 7).  
Press the REC button on the camcorder or the VTR  
button on the lens.  
Test recording starts.  
After about 1 minute, the tape is rewound to the  
recording start position and playback starts. The  
following is displayed during playback.  
Display  
Diagnostic result  
ERROR CODE 000 Ordinary warnings or cautions are  
<AUTO CHECK>  
PLAY  
ERROR CODE 001 Recording on the inserted cassette is  
not enabled. Insert a cassette that is  
PLEASE WAIT  
recordable and repeat the auto-check.  
ERROR CODE 002 A problem in the VTR’s internal  
to 009  
operations has occurred. Repeat the  
auto-check. If the result is the same,  
contact your Sony dealer.  
6
Check the recording quality of the playback video on  
the viewfinder or the monitor. Check the recording  
quality of the playback audio from the speaker,  
earphone, or headphones.  
ERROR CODE 010 A problem in the VTR’s internal  
to 023  
operations has occurred. Clean the  
video heads using the DVM-12CLD  
Cleaning Cassette and repeat the auto-  
check. If the result is the same, contact  
your Sony dealer.  
If the recording quality is poor  
A problem may exist regardless of whether or not it is  
detected by the internal check. Refer to  
“Troubleshooting” on page 128 and repeat the test. If  
the recording quality remains poor, contact your Sony  
dealer.  
When playback ends, the results of the internal check  
are displayed.  
7
After confirming the result (see the next section,  
“Confirming the result”), press the center of the arrow  
key under the AUDIO adjustment cover.  
The auto-check is completed.  
121  
Maintenance  
With a device that does not identify the data transfer speed,  
the maximum data transfer speed that the device supports  
is S100.  
When connecting with the device that support different  
data transfer speed, the actual data transfer speed may be  
different from those described on the i.LINK connectors.  
About i.LINK  
The camcorder is equipped with the DV IN/OUT  
connector based on i.LINK (IEEE1394) standard.  
This section explains the specifications and features of  
i.LINK.  
* What is Mbps?  
Mega bits per second. A measure of the rate at which data  
is transmitted per second. In case of 100 Mbps, 100 Mega  
bits of data can be transmitted per second.  
What is i.LINK?  
i.LINK is a digital serial interface designed to integrate the  
devices equipped with i.LINK connector. By connecting  
i.LINK devices, i.LINK allows your device to:  
- Transmit and receive data such as digital audio and  
digital video signals in two ways  
- Control other i.LINK devices  
- Easily connect with another device using just an i.LINK  
cable.  
Your i.LINK device is capable of connecting AV devices  
and perform various operations and data transfer. Further  
availability for connections with versatile equipment and  
operations will be planned in the future.  
i.LINK operation with your camcorder  
For details on operation when other equipment with  
i.LINK (DV) connector is connected, see page 41.  
For details on connection with i.LINK cable and necessary  
software, refer to the operating instructions supplied with  
the connected device.  
Use Sony i.LINK cables  
Use Sony i.LINK cables to connect the i.LINK devices.  
6 pins y 4 pins (For dubbing)  
6 pins y 6 pins (For dubbing)  
Other advantages include the following feature. When  
connecting multiple i.LINK devices, your device cannot  
only perform operations and data transfer with the directly  
connected device but also perform them with any of the  
devices that are connected via other devices. Therefore,  
you will not need to concern the order of connecting  
devices.  
i.LINK and are trademarks.  
However, depending on the features and specifications of  
the connected devices, you may need to operate certain  
functions differently or may not be able to perform certain  
operations or data transfer.  
i.LINK, a nickname for IEEE 1394 that Sony proposed, is  
a trademark supported by a majority of companies  
worldwide.  
IEEE 1394 is an international standard defined by IEEE,  
The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc.  
Note  
The camcorder can be connected to one device with the  
i.LINK cable (DV cable). When you connect with a device  
that has two or more i.LINK connectors, refer to the  
operating instructions supplied with the connected device.  
About data transfer speed of i.LINK  
i.LINK defines a maximum data transfer speed of  
*
approximately 100, 200 and 400 Mbps that are described  
as S100, S200 and S400 respectively.  
For i.LINK devices, a maximum data transfer speed that  
the device supports is identified on “specifications” page  
of the operating instructions supplied with the device or  
near its i.LINK connector.  
122  
About i.LINK  
 
Note on data read/write speed  
Data read/write speed may vary depending on the  
combination of the “Memory Stick” and “Memory Stick”  
compliant product you use.  
About a “Memory Stick”  
What is “Memory Stick”?  
What is MagicGate?  
MagicGate is copyright protection technology that uses  
encryption technology.  
“Memory Stick” is a new compact, portable and versatile  
IC (Integrated Circuit) recording medium with a data  
capacity that exceeds a floppy disk. “Memory Stick” is  
specially designed for exchanging and sharing digital data  
among “Memory Stick” compatible products. Because it is  
removable, “Memory Stick” can also be used for external  
data storage.  
Before using a “Memory Stick”  
Terminal  
“Memory Stick” is available in two sizes: standard size  
and compact “Memory Stick Duo” size. Once attached to  
a “Memory Stick Duo” adapter, “Memory Stick Duo”  
turns to the same size as standard “Memory Stick” and thus  
can be used with products compliant with standard  
“Memory Stick”.  
Write-protect tab  
Labelling position  
• When you set the “Memory Stick” erasure prevention  
switch to “LOCK,” data cannot be recorded, edited, or  
erased.  
• Data may be damaged if:  
- You remove the “Memory Stick” or turn off the unit  
while it is reading or writing data.  
Types of “Memory Stick”  
“Memory Stick” is available in the following four types to  
meet various requirements in functions.  
- You use the “Memory Stick” in a location subject to  
the effects of static electricity or electric noise.  
• We recommend that you make a backup copy of  
important data that you record on the “Memory Stick”.  
“Memory Stick-R”  
Stored data are not overwritten. You can write data to  
“Memory Stick-R” with “Memory Stick-R” compatible  
products only. Copyright protected data that requires  
MagicGate copyright protection technology cannot be  
written to “Memory Stick-R”.  
Notes  
• Do not attach anything other than the supplied label to  
the “Memory Stick” labelling position.  
• Attach the label so that it does not stick out beyond the  
labelling position.  
“Memory Stick”  
Stores any type of data except copyright-protected data  
that requires the MagicGate copyright protection  
technology.  
• Carry and store the “Memory Stick” in its case.  
• Do not touch the connector of the “Memory Stick” with  
anything, including your finger or metallic objects.  
• Do not strike, bend, or drop the “Memory Stick”.  
• Do not disassemble or modify the “Memory Stick”.  
• Do not allow the “Memory Stick” to get wet.  
• Do not use or store the “Memory Stick” in a location that  
is:  
“MagicGate Memory Stick”  
Equipped with the MagicGate copyright protection  
technology.  
“Memory Stick-ROM”  
Stores pre-recorded, read-only data. You cannot record on  
“Memory Stick-ROM” or erase the pre-recorded data.  
- Extremely hot, such as in a car parked in the sun  
- Under direct sunlight  
- Very humid or subject to corrosive substances  
Available types of “Memory Stick”  
You can use a “Memory Stick” and “MagicGate Memory  
Stick” with your product.  
“Memory Stick” access indicator  
Note  
If the access indicator is turned on or is flashing, data is  
being read from or written to the “Memory Stick”. At this  
time, do not shake the computer or product or subject them  
to shock. Do not turn off the power of the computer and  
product or remove the “Memory Stick”. This may damage  
the data.  
You can not use a “Memory Stick Duo” with your product.  
123  
About a “Memory Stick”  
     
Precautions  
• To prevent data loss, make backups of data frequently. In  
no event will Sony be liable for any loss of data.  
• Unauthorized recording may be contrary to the  
provisions of copyright law. When you use a “Memory  
Stick” that has been pre-recorded, be sure that the  
material has been recorded in accordance with copyright  
and other applicable laws.  
• The “Memory Stick” application software of the  
camcorder may be modified or changed by Sony without  
prior notice.  
• Note that there are certain restrictions on recording stage  
performances and other entertainment events, even if  
they are recorded for personal use only.  
• “Memory Stick” and  
Corporation.  
are trademarks of Sony  
• “Memory Stick Duo” and “  
” are  
trademarks of Sony Corporation.  
• “MagicGate” and “  
” are trademarks  
of Sony Corporation.  
124  
About a “Memory Stick”  
Operation Warnings  
When a problem occurs at power on or during operation, a  
warning is given by one of the following.  
• Warning indicators on the STATUS screen of the LCD  
monitor  
The volume of the audible warnings can be adjusted with  
the ALARM knob. Set the ALARM knob to the minimum  
to mute the sound.  
• WARNING lamps, and audible warnings from the  
speaker and earphones  
• Indicators on the viewfinder  
STATUS screen of  
the LCD monitor WARNING lamp  
and viewfinder  
Warning  
sounds  
Indicators in  
viewfinder  
Problem  
VTR operation  
Action to take  
Continuous  
1 beep/s  
REC/  
BATT  
TALLY  
:
Continuous  
1 flash/s  
Warning indicator  
:
:Continuous  
:
4 flashes/s  
:1 flash/s  
4 beeps/s  
:4 flashes/s  
1)  
1)  
1)  
Warning: RF  
Clogging of  
the video  
head. Trouble clogging of the  
A warning sound Clean the video  
is heard when  
head. If recording  
still fails after  
in the  
recording  
section.  
head is  
cleaning the head,  
turn off the power  
and consult your  
Sony  
detected.  
Recording may  
fail.  
representative.  
2)  
2)  
2)  
Warning: SERVO  
Warning: HUMID  
Servo  
problems.  
Recording  
continues but  
may be  
Turn off the power  
and consult your  
Sony  
substandard.  
representative.  
Condensation During  
occurs. recording,  
While the power is  
turned on, wait  
until the HUMID  
indicator  
recording  
continues.  
Otherwise,  
operation stops.  
Ejecting the tape  
is the only  
disappears.  
operation  
allowed.  
Warning: SLACK  
Er **-***  
Trouble when Operation stops. Follow the  
forwarding or  
rewinding a  
tape.  
instructions given  
in the error code  
list (page 127).  
Turn off the power  
and consult your  
Sony  
3)  
representative.  
Warning:  
CASSETTE  
Er **-***  
Trouble when Operation stops. Follow the  
inserting or  
ejecting a  
cassette.  
instructions given  
in the error code  
list (page 127).  
Turn off the power  
and consult your  
Sony  
representative.  
125  
Operation Warnings  
   
STATUS screen of  
the LCD monitor WARNING lamp  
and viewfinder  
Warning  
sounds  
Indicators in  
viewfinder  
Problem  
VTR operation  
Action to take  
Continuous  
1 beep/s  
REC/  
BATT  
TALLY  
:
Continuous  
1 flash/s  
Warning indicator  
:
:Continuous  
:
4 flashes/s  
:1 flash/s  
4 beeps/s  
:4 flashes/s  
Warning:  
REFERENCE  
Reference  
A warning sound Check if the  
signalproblem is heard when a reference signal is  
during  
recording.  
reference signal input appropriately  
problem is to the GENLOCK  
detected during IN connector.  
recording.  
Recording  
continues but  
may be  
substandard.  
1)  
1)  
1)  
Warning: TAPE  
(remaining tape  
capacity also  
flashes.)  
Tape almost  
full.  
Operation  
continues.  
Change the tape  
when necessary.  
Tape full.  
Operation stops Change the tape or  
duringrecording, rewind it.  
playback, and  
fast-forwarding.  
Warning: BATT  
(remaining battery  
capacity also  
flashes.)  
Battery almost Operation  
Change the battery  
when necessary.  
exhausted.  
continues.  
Battery  
exhausted.  
Operation stops. Change the  
battery.  
Warning: LID  
OPEN  
The lid of the Operation  
An indicator  
appears for several  
seconds and  
disappears  
2)  
cassette  
continues.  
compartment  
is not closed.  
automatically.  
Close the lid  
securely.  
1) During recording  
2) During recording and playback  
3) Note that a tape is damaged if the camcorder is operated while “SLACK”  
is displayed.  
For details about the warning displays and error messages  
on the viewfinder, see page 127.  
126  
Operation Warnings  
Error code list  
Operation/error messages  
An operation or error message is displayed in the  
operation/error message display area (page 22) in the  
viewfinder.  
Error code Action to take  
Er07-***  
Er08-***  
Er09-***  
Turn off the power and consult your Sony  
representative.  
Or you may be able to eject the cassette using  
the following procedure. However, because it  
may damage the cassette, any damage is  
your responsibility.  
Operation/error  
message  
Meaning  
INTERVAL  
Indicates the camcorder is in the  
Interval Rec mode.  
When “Warning: SLACK” appears  
1 Turn off the camcorder.  
This may take about 15 seconds.  
2 When the camcorder is turned off, turn it on  
again.  
LOW LIGHT  
Appears, depending on the  
setting, to indicate the subject  
illumination is inadequate.  
3 If the error code disappears, change the  
cassette because it may be damaged.  
If the error message appears again, turn off  
the power and consult your Sony  
representative.  
When “Warning: CASSETTE” appears  
1 Press and hold the STOP button and the  
EJECT button at the same time for more  
than 3 seconds.  
2 When the PLAY button, the REW button,  
and the FF button all flash at one time,  
release your fingers.  
3 If the cassette is ejected, change the  
cassette because it may be damaged.  
If the error message appears again, turn off  
the power and consult your Sony  
representative.  
Er09-200  
Er09-500  
Er09-600  
Er09-900  
Er91-***  
Er92-***  
Turn off the power and consult your Sony  
representative.  
Turn off the power and consult your Sony  
representative.  
When the error code other than the ones listed above is  
displayed, turn off the power and consult your Sony  
representatives.  
127  
Operation Warnings  
     
Troubleshooting  
You can use this chart to establish possible causes of an  
apparent problem; always double-check before sending  
the camcorder for repair. If a problem persists, contact  
your Sony dealer.  
When the indication “Er00-***” appears in the LCD  
Symptoms  
Cause  
Remedy  
The camcorder does not power on There is no battery pack loaded.  
Attach a battery pack (page 29).  
when you turn the POWER switch  
The battery pack is exhausted.  
on.  
Replace the battery pack with a fully charged  
one (page 29).  
The AC adaptor is not connected, or it is  
not turned on.  
Connect the AC adaptor, or turn on the  
POWER switch of the AC adaptor (page 29).  
The tape transport does not operate The POWER switch is turned off.  
Set the POWER switch to ON.  
when you press either VTR button.  
The camcorder has reached the end of  
Rewind the tape, or load a new cassette.  
tape.  
The cassette is set record-inhibited.  
Load a new cassette, or release the record-  
inhibit (page 48).  
The tape transport does not operate The camcorder has reached the end of  
Rewind the tape, or load a new cassette.  
when you press the PLAY button.  
tape.  
The power supply cuts while  
operating.  
The battery pack is exhausted.  
Replace the battery pack with a fully charged  
one (page 29).  
The battery goes dead very quickly. The operating temperature is very low.  
Use a BP-GL95 (page 29).  
The battery pack is inadequately charged. Recharge the battery pack (page 29).  
It is not possible to eject the  
cassette.  
The battery pack is exhausted.  
Replace the battery pack with a fully charged  
one (page 29).  
The POWER switch is turned off.  
Turn the POWER switch to ON.  
The playback picture quality is poor. The video heads are dirty.  
The playback picture does not  
Clean the video heads using a DVM-12CLD  
Cleaning Cassette (page 120).  
appear.  
The playback sound does not hear.  
All controls except the EJECT  
button are disabled.  
There is condensation.  
Remove the cassette and wait with the  
power on until the condensation has  
evaporated(page 119).  
Audio recording is not possible.  
The AUDIO LEVEL (CH-1/CH-2) knobs  
are set to the minimum level.  
Adjust the setting of the AUDIO LEVEL (CH-  
1/CH-2) controls (page 14).  
Audio recording is not possible (CH- The AUDIO LEVEL knob on the front is set Adjust the setting of the AUDIO LEVEL knob  
1 only).  
to the minimum level.  
on the front (page 10).  
The recorded sound is distorted.  
The audio level is too high.  
Adjust the setting of the AUDIO LEVEL (CH-  
1/CH-2) knobs, and record again (page 14).  
The recorded sound has a high  
noise level.  
The audio level is too low.  
Adjust the setting of the AUDIO LEVEL (CH-  
1/CH-2) knobs, and record again (page 14).  
The cassette is automatically  
ejected.  
An incorrect type of cassette is inserted.  
The settings of the camcorder and the  
Insert a correct type of cassette (page 47).  
The equipment connected to the  
Set correctly. See “Using an i.LINK  
camcorder via an i.LINK connection connected equipment (the VTR TRIGGER Connection” on page 41.  
carries out unintended operations, switch, etc.) are incorrect.  
such as recording automatically.  
128  
Troubleshooting  
 
Symptoms  
Cause  
Remedy  
The equipment connected to the  
camcorder via an i.LINK connection equipment to recognize the operation.  
does not react as expected, for  
It sometimes takes time for the connected Wait for about 15 seconds. If the connected  
equipment still does not react, do the  
following.  
example, the video image does not  
appear on its screen.  
• Check the i.LINK connection, for example,  
by re-inserting the i.LINK cable.  
Turn the power off, and connect the cable  
again.  
• Change the i.LINK cable.  
The camera is not recognized by  
the PC that is connected to the  
i.LINK connector.  
There is a problem with the software, for  
example, it does not support the DVCAM format.  
format, etc.  
Install software that supports the DVCAM  
The camera is not controlled by the There is a problem with the software, for  
Install software that supports the DVCAM  
example, it does not support the DVCAM format. Or set the REC TRIGGER switch to  
format, etc. INT.  
PC that is connected to the i.LINK  
connector.  
129  
Troubleshooting  
Video Camera Section  
Specifications  
General  
Imager  
2/3-inch type, Power HAD EX CCD  
Total picture elements  
General  
Power voltage 12 V DC +5.0/–1.0 V  
Power consumption  
1038 (H) × 1008 (V) (DSR-400/  
450WS), or 1038 (H) × 1188 (V)  
(DSR-400P/450WSP)  
Effective picture elements  
980 (H) × 988 (V) (DSR-400/450WS),  
or 980 (H) × 1064 (V) (DSR-400P/  
450WSP)  
Approx. 17 W (with 12 V DC supply,  
when recording with the LCD monitor  
off)  
Operating temperature  
0°C to +40°C (32°F to 104°F)  
Storage temperature  
Imager Configuration  
RGB 3 CCDs  
Spectral system  
20°C to +60°C (–4°F to +140°F)  
F1.4 prism system (with quartz filter)  
Recording format  
Built-in filter ND filter  
1: Clear  
DVCAM, DV-SP  
Continuous operating time  
Approx. 300 min. (with BP-GL95)  
2: 1/4 ND  
3: 1/16 ND  
4: 1/64 ND  
Mass  
Approx. 3.9 kg (8 lb 10 oz) (main body  
only)  
Lens mount  
Sensitivity  
2/3-inch 48 bayonet mount  
F11 standard (89.9% reflection chart,  
2000 lx)  
Approx. 6.5 kg (14 lb 5 oz) (with  
viewfinder, microphone, tape, BP-  
GL65 Battery Pack, and VCL-917BY  
Zoom Lens)  
Minimum illumination  
0.51x (at F1.4, +36 dB gain)  
Dimensions  
Video S/N ratio 65 dB (Y-typical) (DSR-400/450WS), or  
63 dB (Y-typical) (DSR-400P/  
450WSP)  
146 (5 3/4)  
Modulation  
DSR-450WS/450WSP: 850 TV lines  
(4:3 mode), 800 TV lines (16:9 mode)  
DSR-400/400P: 920 TV lines  
Registration  
0.05% or less for entire screen area  
(excluding distortion due to lens)  
268 (10 5/8) 215  
(8 1/2)  
Geometric distortion  
None identified (excluding distortion due  
to lens)  
–140 dB (Y-typical)  
328 (13)  
in mm (inches)  
Smear  
LCD monitor Picture: 6.3 cm (2 1/2 inches) in opposite  
angle (2.5 type)  
Supplied accessories  
VCL-917BY Zoom Lens (1) (supplied  
with DSR-400K/400PK only)  
DXF-801 Viewfinder (1)  
Microphone (1)  
Pixel resolution: 214,000 pixels (964  
wide × 222 high)  
Effective picture elements: more than  
99.99%  
Wind screen (1)  
Shoulder strap (1)  
VCT-U14 Tripod Adaptor (1)  
Lens mount cap (1)  
Flange focal length adjustment test chart  
(1)  
Operating Instructions  
English version (1)  
Viewfinder  
CRT  
Indicator  
1.5-inch monochrome  
REC (× 2), TALLY, BATT, SHUTTER,  
GAIN UP  
Horizontal resolution  
600 TV lines  
Power voltage 12 V DC  
Power consumption  
2.4 W  
Japanese version (1)  
CD-ROM manual (1)  
Mass  
Approx. 620 g (1 lb 6 oz)  
Maximum dimensions  
241 × 91 × 203 mm (9 1/2 × 3 5/8 × 8 inch)  
(w/h/d)  
130  
Specifications  
 
Audio system (at playback with the DSR-1800A)  
Frequency response  
48 kHz: 20 Hz to 20 kHz +0.5/–1.0 dB  
32 kHz: 20 Hz to 14.5 kHz +0.5/–1.0 dB  
Dynamic range Min. 80 dB  
Microphone  
Type  
Directivity  
Frequency response  
100 Hz to 20 kHz  
Output impedance  
100 Ω  
Power voltage 48 V DC  
Black electret condenser microphone  
Super cardioid  
Distortion (THD) (1 kHz reference level, 48 kHz)  
Max. 0.12%  
Mass  
Dimensions  
Approx. 115 g (4 oz)  
Input/output connectors  
162 × 21 mm (6 1/2 × 27/32 inch) (length  
Signal inputs  
× diameter) (excluding cable)  
AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2  
XLR type, 3-pin, female –60 dBu/+4 dBu  
(0 dBu = 0.775 Vrms)  
Tape section  
MIC IN  
XLR type, 3-pin, female –60 dBu  
General  
GENLOCK IN BNC type, 1.0 Vp-p, 75 , unbalanced  
TC IN  
Video recording system  
2 rotary heads, Helical scanning system  
Audio recording system  
2 rotary heads  
BNC type, 0.5 V to 18 Vp-p, 10 kΩ  
Signal outputs  
AUDIO OUT CH-1/CH-2  
RCA type, –10 dBu, 47 kΩ  
MONITOR OUT  
BNC type, 1.0 Vp-p, 75 , unbalanced  
VIDEO OUT (DSR-450WS/450WSP only)  
BNC type, 75 , unbalanced  
VBS OUT: 1.0 Vp-p  
Quantization: 12bits Fs32K (channels 1/  
2, channels 3/4)  
16bits Fs48K (channels 1/2)  
NTSC color, EIA standards (DSR-400/  
450WS)  
Video signal  
PAL color, CCIR standards (DSR-400P/  
450WSP)  
SDI OUT: 0.8 Vp-p (only when the CBK-  
SD01 is installed)  
BNC type, 1.0 Vp-p, 75 Ω  
Usable cassette DVCAM cassette with the  
mark printed, DV cassette with the  
mark printed, Mini DV cassette  
TC OUT  
EARPHONE (mini jack)  
with the  
mark printed  
DVCAM format: Approx. 28.193 mm/s  
(DSR-400/450WS), or 28.221 mm/s  
(DSR-400P/450WSP)  
8 , – to –18 dBs variable  
Tape speed  
Others  
DC IN  
DC OUT  
XLR type, 4-pin, male, 11 to 17 V DC  
4-pin, 11 to 17 V DC, maximum rated  
current 0.2 A  
12-pin  
8-pin  
DV format SP mode: Approx.18.795  
mm/s (DSR-400/450WS), or 18.814  
mm/s (DSR-400P/450WSP)  
LENS  
REMOTE  
LIGHT  
i.LINK  
Recording/playback time  
DVCAM format: 184 min. (using  
2-pin  
6-pin  
cassette PDV-184ME)  
DV format SP mode: 276 min. (using  
cassette PDV-184ME)  
Pin assignment of the connectors  
Fast-forward/rewind time  
DC IN connector (4-pin, male)  
Approx. 45 sec. (using cassette DVM60/  
PDVM-40ME)  
Approx. 2 min 30 sec. (using cassette  
PDV-184ME)  
4
1
3
2
Video system (at playback with the DSR-1800A)  
Bandwidth  
Luminance (Y): 30 Hz to 5.0 MHz 1.0  
dB  
Pin number  
Standard  
Signal  
Chrominance (R-Y/B-Y): 30 Hz to 1.5  
MHz +1.0/–5.0 dB  
Luminance: Min. 55 dB  
1
2
3
4
EXT DC IN (G)  
GND  
S/N ratio  
K-factor (2T pulse)  
Max. 2%  
Y/C time delay Max. 30 nsec.  
EXT DC IN (X)  
+11 to +17Vdc  
131  
Specifications  
AUDIO IN CH-1/CH-2 connector (3-pin, female)  
Cables and miscellaneous  
i.LINK cable (DV connecting cable)  
CCFD-3L (6-pin y 4-pin, 3.5m)  
CCF-3L (6-pin y 6-pin, 3.5m)  
LC-H300 Hard Carrying Case  
2
1
3
LC-DS300SFT Soft Carrying Case  
LCR-1 Rain Cover  
Design and specifications are subject to change without  
notice.  
Pin number  
Standard  
Signal  
1
2
3
MIC IN (G)  
MIC IN (X)  
MIC IN (Y)  
GND  
60dBu  
When ZI is equal to  
or more than 3k/  
+4dBu, 10kΩ  
BALANCED  
Related Products  
There is a range of Sony products available to meet every  
conceivable video shooting requirement. For details,  
consult your Sony sales representative or supplier.  
Power supply and related equipment  
BP- GL65/GL95/L60S Battery Pack  
BC-M50/M150 Battery Charger  
AC-550 AC Adaptor  
AC-DN10 AC Adaptor  
Equipment for remote control  
RM-B150/B750 Remote Control Unit (can be installed to  
the DSR-450WS/450WSP only)  
“Memory Stick”  
MSH-32 (32 MB)  
MSH-64 (64 MB)  
MSH-128 (128 MB)  
Audio equipment  
ECM-670/672 Microphone  
CAC-12 Microphone Holder  
WRR-855 UHF Synthesized Tuner Unit  
WRR-861/862 UHF Portable Tuner  
WRT-822/824 UHF Transmitter  
WRR Tuner Fitting (service part number: A-8278-057-A)  
DMX-P01 Portable Digital Mixer  
For Audio equipment described above, confirm whether  
the connector is male or female and the number of pins on  
the connector.  
The audio input connectors of the camcorder are female  
and 3-pin. A converting adaptor may be required.  
Studio equipment  
DXF-51 5-inch Viewfinder (monochrome)  
Extension boards (DSR-450WS/450WSP only)  
CBK-SD01 SDI Output Board  
CBK-SC01 Composite Input Board  
132  
Specifications  
Chart of Optional Components and Accessories  
For DSR-400/400P  
LMD series  
LCD Monitor  
ECM-670/672 and C-74  
Microphone  
DSR-50/50P  
Digital Videocassette Recorder  
CAC-12  
Microphone Holder  
DXF-51/51CE *  
5-inch Viewfinder  
DSR-1500A/1600A/1800A/2000A  
Digital Videocassette Recorder  
DVCAM mini size  
cassette tape  
DVCAM  
standard size  
cassette tape  
DSR-400/400P  
VCT-U14  
Tripod Adaptor  
BP-GL65/GL95/L60S  
Battery Pack  
BC-M150  
Battery Charger  
BC-M50  
Battery Charger  
Tripod  
AC-550  
AC Adaptor  
LC-DS300SFT  
Soft Carrying Case  
AC-DN2B/AC-DN10  
AC Adaptor  
CA-WR855  
Camera Adaptor  
NTSC: WRR-855B  
PAL: WRR-588A/B  
UHF Synthesized Tuner  
LC-H300  
Carrying Case  
LCR-1 Rain cover  
* Optional accessory shoe kit is required for fitting. For details, consult your  
Sony dealer.  
133  
Chart of Optional Components and Accessories  
 
For DSR-450WS/450WSP  
LMD series  
LCD Monitor  
ECM-670/672 and C-74  
Microphone  
DSR-50/50P  
Digital Videocassette Recorder  
CAC-12  
Microphone Holder  
DXF-51/51CE *  
5-inch Viewfinder  
DSR-1500A/1600A/1800A/2000A  
Digital Videocassette Recorder  
DVCAM mini size  
cassette tape  
DVCAM  
standard size  
cassette tape  
DSR-450WS/450WSP  
CBK-SC01  
Analog Composite Input  
Board  
CBK-SD01  
SDI Output Board  
BP-GL65/GL95/L60S  
Battery Pack  
BC-M150  
BC-M50  
Battery Charger  
Battery Charger  
RM-B150/B750  
Remote Control Unit  
AC-550  
AC Adaptor  
AC-DN2B/AC-DN10  
AC Adaptor  
VCT-U14  
Tripod Adaptor  
CA-WR855  
Camera Adaptor  
NTSC: WRR-855B  
PAL: WRR-588A/B  
UHF Synthesized Tuner  
Tripod  
LC-DS300SFT  
Soft Carrying Case  
LC-H300  
Carrying Case  
LCR-1 Rain cover  
* Optional accessory shoe kit is required for fitting. For details, consult your  
Sony dealer.  
134  
Chart of Optional Components and Accessories  
used mainly to adjust the tracking  
position of video heads, and to  
achieve time code continuity when  
recording continuously. This signal is  
recorded in a longitudinal tape track.  
Flare  
The loss of contrast in an image  
caused by unnecessary light that  
strays into the image plane.  
Glossary  
ATW  
Flicker  
Auto Tracing White balance. The  
white balance is automatically  
adjusted for the lighting conditions  
during shooting.  
DCC  
Repeated changes in screen  
brightness caused by an interference  
between the camera's scanning and  
the lighting conditions.  
Abbreviation for dynamic contrast  
control. In a high contrast  
environment, this function  
compresses the high light signal by  
adjusting the knee point  
Bayonet type  
GENLOCK  
A type of lens mount. The lens can be  
inserted into the lens mount and fixed  
in place by rotating a ring.  
A state in which devices are locked to  
a signal output by a sync generator.  
Genlock allows multiple devices to  
operate in synchronization.  
automatically, allowing you to take  
clear pictures in a dynamic range.  
Drop frame mode  
SMPTE time code runs at 30 frames/  
second, while the NTSC color  
Black balance  
To balance the black level of the R,  
G, and B signals so that black has no  
color.  
HAD  
Abbreviation for hole-accumulated  
diode. A CCD sensor structure  
designed to suppress certain types of  
noise inherent to CCDs.  
television system runs at about 29.97  
frames/second. Drop frame mode  
adjusts the running of time code to  
eliminate the discrepancy between  
time code value and actual time by  
dropping two frames from the time  
code value at the beginning of each  
minute except every tenth minute.  
CCD  
Abbreviation for charge-coupled  
device. A semiconductor used in  
place of a camera tube. The CCD  
converts light into electrical charge,  
and outputs the electrical charge in  
the form of varying voltages.  
Head drum  
See “Drum”.  
Horizontal resolution  
The horizontal resolution of the  
screen, which is expressed as the  
number of vertical lines  
distinguishable when shooting a test  
chart.  
Drum  
A metal cylinder to which the video  
heads are attached. During recording  
and playback, the drum rotates at  
high speed in synchronization with a  
control signal.  
Center marker  
A cross on the viewfinder screen that  
indicates the center of an image.  
Color bar signals  
i.LINK  
Test signals displayed on the screen  
as multicolored vertical stripes. Used  
for adjustment of hue, and saturation  
of a video camera and video monitor.  
Another name for the IEEE1394-  
1995 standards and their revisions.  
XDCAM uses the i.LINK interface to  
transfer DV streams by the AV/C  
protocol, and toread and write MPEG  
IMX and DVCAM data files by FAM  
(File Access Mode).  
EBU  
Abbreviation for European  
Broadcasting Union. A professional  
broadcasting establishment in  
Europe.  
Color conversion filter (CC  
filter)  
A filter that converts the color  
temperature to a reference value so  
the same picture tone is obtained in  
different lighting conditions.  
EXT TC (External time code)  
A time code input from external  
equipment together with audio data.  
It corresponds to the conventional  
time code recorded on tape based  
media. Instead the EXT TC is usually  
used to record time codes and audio  
signals that are played back by  
Interlaced scan mode  
A scanning method in which odd  
rows fields are read alternately with  
even rows. (Odd-row fields and  
evenrow fields contain images from  
different times.)  
Color temperature  
The color quality of light, expressed  
in Kelvin (K).  
equipment that is not synchronized  
with the reference video signal.  
ND filter  
Composite video signal  
A signal that consists of video  
(luminance and color sub carrier),  
sync (horizontal and vertical), and  
color burst signals.  
Abbreviation for neutral density  
filter. A filter that reduces the amount  
of incident light equally across the  
entire visible wavelength range  
without affecting color.  
Ff  
Flange focal length  
The length between the objective lens  
and the surface of the imager.  
CTL  
Non-drop frame mode  
Abbreviation for control signal. A  
signal that you can count to  
determine the number of frames, and  
therefore the tape's running time. It is  
A mode of advancing time code  
which ignores the difference in frame  
values between real time and the time  
135  
Glossary  
     
code. Using this mode produces a  
difference of approximately 86  
seconds per day between real time  
and time code, which causes  
problems when editing programs in  
units of seconds using the number of  
frames as a reference.  
Servo  
longitudinal time code (LTC) and  
vertical interval time code (VITC).  
A mechanism that controls the  
number and phase of revolutions of  
the head drum, capstan, or reel tables.  
The servo mechanism allows  
recording and playback of the video  
signal without guard band noise. The  
reference signal of the servo control  
is normally a vertical sync signal.  
Time code synchronization  
To synchronize the built-in time code  
generator of video equipment to an  
external time code.  
Time data  
NTSC  
Time information that is generated by  
a time code generator or read by a  
time code reader.  
Abbreviation for National Television  
System Committee. NTSC is a color  
TV broadcasting system adopted  
mainly in North American countries,  
and in parts of Asia and Central and  
South America.  
Shot data  
Data recorded, while shooting, in the  
color bars, the user bits data of VITC,  
and so forth. Includes the model  
name, serial number, date, time, shot  
number, and ID1 to ID4.  
User's bits  
A 32-bit section of time code in  
which you can record desired  
information such as the year, month,  
date and reel numbers.  
PAL  
Abbreviation for Phase Alternating  
Line.PAL is a color TV broadcasting  
system developed by Telefunken  
GmbH of Germany. This system is  
adopted mainly in European  
countries, in Australia, and in parts of  
Asia and South America.  
Shutter speed  
The time that the shutter is open.  
Slow shutter speeds give bright  
images, but motion resolution is  
lower.  
VBS  
Abbreviation for video-burst-sync. A  
composite signal consisting of a  
video signal, a burst signal, and a  
sync signal.  
SMPTE  
Society of Motion Picture and  
Television Engineers, a professional  
association established in the U.S.A.  
mainly for the purpose of setting  
forth motion picture and television  
engineering standards.  
VITC  
Progressive scan mode  
A scanning method in which odd  
rows and even rows are read at the  
same time. Also called full-screen  
scanning.  
Abbreviation for vertical interval  
time code. A time code recorded on  
tape with video signals and inserted  
in the vertical blanking interval of  
video signals.The VTR can read this  
time code even in still mode.  
Reference video signal  
Stand-by off mode  
A video signal that contains a sync  
signal or sync and burst signals, used  
as a reference for synchronization of  
video equipment.  
A mode in which the head drum is  
stationary and the tape is slack. It  
means that the VTR is not ready for  
immediate recording or playback. It  
does not mean that the tape or video  
heads are damaged.  
White balance  
The adjustment of red, green and blue  
signal levels so that white objects are  
reproduced as true white.  
Return video  
White shading  
Video signals that are sent back from  
a VTR to a camera or from a control  
console to a camera so that a camera  
operator can verify the recorded/  
selected video signals.  
A phenomenon whereby the upper  
and lower portions of the white object  
that you are shooting appear magenta  
or green, while the central portion of  
the image appears white.  
Stand-by on mode  
A mode in which the head drum  
rotates with the tape wrapped around  
it. It means that the VTR is ready for  
recording or playback. The VTR  
comes into Stand-by off mode in a  
settled time not to damage tape and  
video head.  
Sampling frequency  
Zebra pattern  
A method used to sample an analog  
signal so that it can be represented  
digitally. The higher the sampling  
frequency is, the more accurately the  
high-frequency analog signal can be  
represented.  
Striped patterns that appear in the  
viewfinder to indicate areas of the  
picture where the video level is about  
70 IRE units or 490 mV.  
Superimpose  
A procedure you use to put one  
picture (or character) over another so  
that both can be seen at the same  
time.  
Zoom  
To gradually change the field of view  
of a camera lens from wide to narrow  
angle (zoom in) or narrow to wide  
angle (zoom out).  
SDI  
Serial Digital Interface. An interface  
standardized as SMPTE 259M which  
enables the transmission of an  
uncompressed digital component  
stream.  
Time code  
A digital signal recorded on the  
videotape that supplies information  
such as the hour, minute, second and  
frame number of each frame. There  
are two kinds of recorded signal:  
Glossary  
136  
Automatic iris  
Index  
B
Symbols  
Battery capacity indicator 24  
Battery pack  
Numerics  
Black balance  
E
A
EDIT SEARCH + FWD/- REV  
Assigning functions to ASSIGN  
Attachment shoe for large  
AUDIO IN input selection  
C
CAMERA STATUS window 102  
Cassette  
Compatibility of DVCAM and DV  
F
CM indicator 24  
Audio input  
Color temperature  
Compatibility of DVCAM and DV  
Setting and examples of shooting  
Fitting for optional microphone  
Using the supplied  
Audio level  
Connecting line input audio  
Controlling the camcorder from  
FORMAT page 79  
FUNCTION 1 page 76  
FUNCTION 2 page 76  
AUDIO OUT CH-1/CH-2  
D
Date/time  
DC IN / battery voltage or remaining  
AUTO IRIS page 78  
137  
 
G
LENS FILE page 79  
Gain  
N
Setting values for the GAIN  
GAIN SW page 77  
Lithium battery  
Warning Indicator 24  
O
OFFSET WHT page 78  
Operation/error message display  
H
OUTPUT page 75  
M
I
P
i.LINK  
MARKER 1 page 77  
MARKER 2 page 77  
Displaying a file-related menu  
Checking the playback image  
VTR 42  
Making backup of recording  
Settings required for an i.LINK  
Using the camcorder as  
Playback  
Power supply  
Menu  
Instant automatic iris adjustment  
R
Recording format  
Recording shot data superimposed on  
Remote control unit  
Camcorder switch functions when  
Model name and serial number  
MONITOR OUT CHARACTER  
MONITOR OUT page 75  
K
L
Paint adjustment when  
1 3 8  
Using settings of the paint  
adjustment data stored in  
Synchronizing two or more  
V
the “independent data  
disconnect a remote  
control unit 39  
VF DISP 1 page 76  
VF DISP 2 page 77  
VF SETTING page 77  
T
Adjusting contrast and  
S
Attaching a 5-inch electronic  
Scene file  
Loading scene files from a  
Fitting the viewfinder 30  
Removing 30  
camcorder memory 116  
Time code  
Making the time code  
Viewfinder front-to-back position  
Viewfinder left-to-right positioning  
Selecting the aspect ratio 106  
SET STATUS page 78  
Setting change and adjustment  
Setting change confirmation/  
adjustment progress messages  
Setup add 65  
Tripod  
U
User bit  
User file  
USER menu  
W
White balance  
SHOT DISP page 78  
SHOT ID page 78  
White balance memory  
Shoulder strap  
SHT ENABLE page 79  
Returning to the standard  
Wireless microphone system  
USER MENU CUSTOMIZE menu  
Adding/deleting/replacing  
SOURCE SEL page 79  
Status confirmation windows  
Z
Resetting USER menu settings to  
139  
Sony Corporation  

ViewSonic 19&quot; Multimedia LCD with 10.000_1 Dynamic Contrast Ratio va1918wm User Manual
Swann DOMECAM SW P DCBW User Manual
Sony DSR45P User Manual
Sony DCR TRV380 User Manual
Sony CFD CD777S MK2 User Manual
Sony Camcorder CD TRV65 User Manual
Samsung VP D 93 i User Manual
Samsung SCL810 User Manual
Samsung Car Video System B2030N User Manual
Salton HB 1094 User Manual